JP6415517B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, it is detected that a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each peripheral surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “game medium”) are inserted and a start lever is operated by a player. , A start switch that outputs a signal requesting the start of rotation of a plurality of reels, and detection of a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels being pressed by the player, and rotation of the corresponding reel A stop switch that outputs a signal requesting the stop of the motor, a stepping motor that is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and that transmits each driving force to each reel, and a signal output by the start switch and the stop switch. And a reel control unit that controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the rotation of the stepping motor and stops and stops each reel. Is detected based on a random number, and the reel is determined based on the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”) and the timing at which the stop button is detected. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that stops the rotation of the machine.

  With this type of gaming machine, the fact that a bonus has been won during the RT gaming state is notified at a timing based on one performance pattern selected from a plurality of performance patterns by the player at the start of the RT gaming state. There is a known gaming machine (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In the case of the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since it is notified that a bonus has been won based on the effect pattern selected by the player, the bonus in the RT gaming state is equivalent to the prepared effect pattern. The notification mode at the time of winning can be diversified.

JP 2009-56081 A

  However, in the case of the conventional gaming machine described above, since there was no consideration for performing AT transition control using a plurality of game information after winning the bonus in the RT gaming state, the AT transition becomes monotonous, and the interest in gaming is lost. There was a problem that it was easy to break.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing more interesting AT transition control for a game using a plurality of game information. To do.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention displays a plurality of reels (3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are arranged and a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the plurality of reels. A symbol display means (reel display window 4), a start operation detection means (start switch 79) for detecting a start operation by the player, and a plurality of reels based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the symbol change means (main CPU 93) that changes the plurality of symbols displayed on the symbol display means by rotating, and the start operation detection means, a predetermined combination is selected from a plurality of roles. Internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 93) for determining an internal winning combination with probability, and a stop operation provided corresponding to the plurality of reels for stopping the rotation of each reel. Based on the stop operation detecting means (stop switches 80L, 80C, 80R) for detecting the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means By stopping the rotation of each reel, the reel stop control means (main CPU 93) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means and any of a plurality of predetermined specific conditions are established. Accordingly, special game state transition means (sub CPU 102) for shifting to a special game state (pseudo bonus state) advantageous to the player with respect to granting of game media (medals), and transition to the special game state are possible. When determined, it relates to a specific state (AT state) in which information on an advantageous stop operation related to the provision of the game medium is notified. Game information determining means (sub CPU102) for determining game information to be determined, and the game information determined by the game information determining means includes a predetermined number of times of performing the specific state (continuation count: number of sets). The first game information in which the specific game state is defined, the second game information in which the continuation rate (continuation probability: loop rate) of the specific state is defined, and the third game information in which the transition rate to the special game state is defined If the first game information is determined by the game information determination means and the third game information is not determined, at least the second game information is determined after the special game state ends. The first game information is held without making a transition to the specific state until the second game information is determined by the game information determination means after the special game state ends. Previous It is characterized by shifting to the specified state.
Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when it is determined to shift to the specific state, the specific operation is performed on the condition that the information on the stop operation is notified for the predetermined number of times in the special game state. A first specific state transition means (sub CPU102) for shifting to a first specific state (first AT state) of the states, and the effect state is shifted from the special gaming state to the first specific state. The first specific state game number determination means (sub CPU102) for determining the number of games (first AT state game number) in the first specific state, and in the first specific state, When a unit game of the number of games in the first specific state determined by the first specific state game number determination means is executed, the second specific state (second AT state) in the specific state The first to move to Specific state transition means (sub CPU102), and the number of games in the second specific state (second AT state game number) when transitioning from the first specific state to the second specific state A second specific state game number determination means (sub CPU102) for determining the number of games in the second specific state determined by the second specific state game number determination means in the second specific state. When a unit game is executed, it further includes a continuation transition means (sub CPU 102) for continuing the specific state by continuously shifting to the first specific state.

With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention performs lottery in order to give a specific state (AT) in a special game, but a plurality of pieces of game information, for example, the number of AT sets and the continuation probability (loop rate) Among them, when the number of AT sets is given, the AT is not started, and when the AT loop rate is given, the AT is started. Thereby, in the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to perform more interesting AT transition control for games using a plurality of game information.
In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention has the effect selected by the player before the start of the pseudo special game state when the transition to the pseudo special game state is determined and the lottery for the transition to the specific effect state is won. In the notification mode based on the mode, the fact that the lottery for the transition to the specific performance state has been won is notified at the timing determined by the lottery, so the content of the performance and the specific performance state that are notified according to the selected performance mode From the timing when the effect of notifying that the transition lottery is won is executed, the player can imagine the future development of the game, etc., and can expand the range of strategy for the game, The interest for development can be enhanced. Furthermore, with this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention executes an effect suggesting different game information for each of the first to third effect modes selected at the start of the pseudo special game state. You can broaden your strategy.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the pseudo special game state transition means determines to shift the effect state to the pseudo special game state, the continuous transition means continues the specific effect state. A continuation number determination unit (sub CPU102) for determining a continuation number (set number) is further provided, and the continuation information storage unit stores the continuation number determined by the continuation number determination unit.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention performs the ART lottery when the transition to the pseudo bonus state is determined, and when the ART lottery is not won, the loop rate and the number of sets determined at the time of the non-winning Can be carried on until the ART lottery is won, so when the ART lottery can finally be won, an increase in the loop rate and the number of sets in the AT state can be expected, and the game in the pseudo bonus state Even if the AT state does not start after the game ends, the player's interest in the game can be maintained until the ART lottery is won, and the player is expected to continue the AT state for a long time. To play games.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the sub control circuit has a plurality of specific performance state lottery tables (normal pseudo-bonus winning ART lottery tables) each set with a probability of shifting to the different specific performance states. And the said specific production | presentation state transfer lottery means determines the normal mode (normal mode 1-5) referred when determining any one from the said several specific production | presentation state lottery tables based on the said non-winning number of times. , Referring to the specific effect table determined based on the determined normal mode, to determine whether or not to shift the effect state to the specific effect state, the selection effect execution means, the effect mode determination means When it is determined that the third effect mode is selected, the specific effect state lottery means refers to the lottery for the next transition to the specific effect state. That run the director suggests the normal mode.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention selects any one specific effect state lottery table from a plurality of specific effect state lottery tables based on the selected normal mode, and selects the selected specific effect state lottery table. In order to execute the lottery transition to the specific effect state based on the selected normal mode, the probability of shifting to the specific effect state differs depending on the selected normal mode and the third effect mode is selected. Since the effect that suggests is executed at the end of the pseudo special game state, the progress of the game can be easily predicted.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the pseudo special game state transition means shifts the effect state to the pseudo special game state when the pseudo special game state transition symbol (pseudo bonus transition symbol) wins, The pseudo special game state transition symbol has the same color transition symbol in which symbols of the same color are displayed in a row on the symbol display means, and the different color transition symbol in which symbols of different colors are displayed in a row on the symbol display means. The special effect state transition lottery means wins the different color transition symbol when the pseudo special game state transition means shifts the effect state to the pseudo special game state by winning the same color transition symbol. Thus, it is configured to make it easier to shift to the specific effect state than to shift the effect state to the pseudo special game state.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention can provide a difference in the winning probability of the specific performance state between the case of the same color transition symbol and the case of the different color transition symbol, so that it can have a change depending on the game characteristics. .

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the continuation transition unit determines that a plurality of continuation probabilities are stored in the continuation information storage unit, the continuation probability other than the last stored continuation probability When determining whether to perform the continuous transition based on the above, the continuous transition is always performed.

  With this configuration, when a plurality of continuation probabilities are stored in the continuation information storage unit, the gaming machine according to the present invention can give a lot of benefits to the player and further improve the interest in the game. be able to.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the internal winning combination includes a predetermined bonus combination (F_MB), and the gaming state transition control means determines that the predetermined bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination. As a condition, the gaming state is changed to a bonus flag carry-over state (RT1 gaming state), and the gaming state is changed to a condition on the condition that a combination of symbols relating to the predetermined bonus combination is displayed by the symbol display means. It is configured to shift from a bonus flag carry-over state to a bonus game state (MB game state) in which game media given to the player does not increase, and the high RT state is set while the game state is in the bonus flag carry-over state It is characterized by that.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention can substantially control the transition of the gaming state between the normal state where the replay probability is low and the high RT state where the replay probability is high. Can reduce the load.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of performing more interesting AT transition control for a game using a plurality of game information.

It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. 1 is an overall perspective view showing an external structure of a pachislot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of the state where the middle door of the pachislot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention was closed. It is a perspective view of the state which opened the middle door of the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a front view which shows the internal structure of the cabinet of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the back surface side of the front door of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. 1 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a main control circuit of a pachislot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a sub-control circuit of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | positioning table memorize | stored in main ROM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol code table memorize | stored in main ROM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination and replay memorize | stored in main ROM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination determination table for bonuses memorize | stored in main ROM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a comparison table of internal winning combinations and winning combinations in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a comparison table of internal winning combinations and winning combinations in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a comparison table of internal winning combinations and winning combinations in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a comparison table of internal winning combinations and winning combinations in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the internal winning combination memorize | stored in main ROM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the internal winning combination memorize | stored in main ROM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the internal winning combination memorize | stored in main ROM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the internal winning combination memorize | stored in main ROM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for general game states memorize | stored in main ROM in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming states memorize | stored in main ROM in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the priority order table memorize | stored in main ROM in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the priority order table for MB game states memorize | stored in main ROM in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the reel stop initial setting table memorize | stored in main ROM in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the drawing priority order table selection table memorize | stored in main ROM in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the drawing priority table memorize | stored in main ROM in the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination storing area memorize | stored in main RAM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display combination storage area memorize | stored in main RAM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol code storage area memorize | stored in main RAM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement stop button storage area memorize | stored in main RAM of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the pressing order storage area memorize | stored in main RAM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the carryover combination storage area memorize | stored in main RAM of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state flag storage area memorize | stored in main RAM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the drawing priority order data storage area memorize | stored in main RAM of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing of each sub-control information which the sub-control circuit of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention controls. 3 is a normal mode reference table when changing settings stored in a ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. 3 is a normal mode reference table stored in a ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is the AT end normal mode reference table lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is the AT end normal mode reference table lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(d) are the high-precision transfer game number lottery tables memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(d) are the high-precision transfer game number lottery tables memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(d) are the high-precision transfer game number lottery tables memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. 6 is a pseudo bonus reference table stored in a ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(d) are the normal time pseudo | simulation bonus lottery tables memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(e) are pseudo | simulation bonus promotion lottery tables memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(e) are pseudo | simulation bonus promotion lottery tables memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(e) are pseudo | simulation bonus finalization screen effect navigation lottery tables memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(e) are pseudo | simulation bonus finalization screen effect navigation lottery tables memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. 4 is an ART reference table stored in a ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a normal time pseudo bonus winning lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a normal time pseudo bonus winning lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a normal time pseudo bonus winning lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. 5 is an ART lottery table during pseudo bonus winning stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus medium ART lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus medium ART lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus medium ART lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is an ART navigation lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a special table lottery table stored on the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a special mode table reference table stored on the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is the first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a lottery table for special mode transition at the start of the first AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a lottery table for special mode transition at the start of the first AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a lottery table for special mode transition at the start of the first AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a lottery table for special mode transition at the start of the first AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a lottery table for special mode transition at the start of the first AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a lottery table for special mode transition at the start of the first AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a lottery table for special mode transition at the start of the first AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a lottery table for special mode transition at the start of the first AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a lottery table for special mode transition at the start of the first AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus lottery table during the first AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) is a pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) are the ART lottery tables for pseudo bonus winning during the AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A), (b) are the ART lottery tables for pseudo bonus winning during the AT state stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(g) is the ART loop lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a special mode transition lottery table for special continuation stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. 5 is an ART lottery table when special conditions are stored, which is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is an ART lottery table during execution of a pseudo bonus added state stored in a ROM cartridge substrate of a pachislot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. (A)-(c) is the normal time precursor game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(d) is the normal time precursor game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(c) is the normal time precursor game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(d) is the normal time precursor game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(c) is the normal time precursor game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachi-slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(d) is the normal time precursor game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a 1st AT state game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A), (b) is a lottery table for adding the first AT state game number stored on the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a 2nd AT state game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a 2nd AT state game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a 2nd AT state game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a 2nd AT state game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a 2nd AT state game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a 2nd AT state game number lottery table memorize | stored in the ROM cartridge board | substrate of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A)-(c) is the first pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is the first pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a second pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A)-(c) is a second pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery table stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is the end effect lottery table at the time of execution of the third pseudo bonus selection effect stored in the ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a transition diagram of a main gaming state in the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a transition diagram of the effect game state in the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart showing main control processing of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a power-on process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 110. FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a medal acceptance / start check process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 110. FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 110. FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a reel stop initial setting process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 110. FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a reel rotation start process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 110. FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a pull-in priority storage process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 110 and the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 119; FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a pull-in priority order table selection process executed in the pull-in priority order storing process shown in FIG. 116. FIG. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing a symbol code storing process executed in the drawing priority order storing process shown in FIG. 116 and the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 119; FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a reel stop control process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 110. FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a priority pull-in control process executed in the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 119. FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing bonus end check processing executed in the main control processing shown in FIG. 110. FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a bonus operation check process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 110. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process by control of the main CPU which comprises the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the input port check process performed in the interruption process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on process of the sub CPU which comprises the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a lamp control task activated in the power-on process shown in FIG. 125. FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a sound control task activated in the power-on process shown in FIG. 125. FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a mother task activated in the power-on process shown in FIG. 125. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main task started in the mother task shown in FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task activated in the mother task shown in FIG. 128. FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed in the main board communication task shown in FIG. 130. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the animation task started in the mother task shown in FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing effect content determination processing executed in the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 131. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start command reception performed in the production content determination process shown in FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a normal processing that is executed in the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 134. FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a normal processing that is executed in the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 134. FIG. 135, 136, normal warning process shown in FIG. 138, pseudo bonus medium process shown in FIGS. 141, 142, pseudo bonus end process shown in FIGS. 143, 144, 145, first AT state start preprocessing shown in FIG. 146, first AT state processing shown in FIGS. 147, 148, second AT state processing shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, FIG. 153 16 is a flowchart showing common processing after ART lottery executed in the second AT state end processing shown in FIG. 5 and the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state processing shown in FIG. 135 and 136, the first AT state processing shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, and the precursor processing that is executed in the second AT state processing shown in FIGS. 149 to 151. It is a flowchart to show. 135 and 136, normal warning processing shown in FIG. 138, first AT state processing shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, and second AT state processing shown in FIGS. 149 to 151. It is a flowchart showing the state transition common processing at the end of the precursor that is executed. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus transition process executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 134. FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a process during pseudo-bonus executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 134. FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a process during pseudo-bonus executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 134. FIG. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus end process executed in the pseudo bonus medium process shown in FIGS. 141 and 142. FIG. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus end process executed in the pseudo bonus medium process shown in FIGS. 141 and 142. FIG. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing a first AT state start pre-processing executed in the pseudo bonus end time processing shown in FIGS. 143 and 144. FIG. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing a first AT state start pre-processing executed in the pseudo bonus end time processing shown in FIGS. 143 and 144. FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a first AT state process executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 134. FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a first AT state process executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 134. FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a second AT state process executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 134. FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a second AT state process executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 134. FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a second AT state process executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 134. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing a second AT state initial process executed in the second AT state process shown in FIGS. 149 to 151. 153 is a flowchart showing a second AT state end time process which is executed in the second AT state process shown in FIGS. 149 to 151. 153 is a flowchart showing a common process at the end of ART executed in the second AT state end process shown in FIG. 153; FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus promotion gaming state process executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 134. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the winning action command reception performed in the production content determination process shown in FIG. It is a front view which shows the special mode suggestion effect which the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention performs in the 1st AT state. It is a front view which shows the special mode alerting | reporting effect which the pachi-slot machine concerning an embodiment of the invention performs in the 2nd AT state. 3 is a character combination table stored in a ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. 3 is a symbol combination table stored in a ROM cartridge substrate of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  A pachislot machine which is an example of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

[Function flow of pachislot machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, in the pachislot machine 1, when a medal as a game medium is inserted by the player and the start lever 23 is operated, a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). One value (hereinafter, random value) is extracted from.

  An internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 93 described later) performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determining means is based on the detection of the unit game start operation on the start lever 23 by the start switch 79 (see FIG. 7) (establishment of a predetermined start condition) with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations. Determine the internal winning role.

  By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols (display combination) that permits display along a winning line as an effective line, which will be described later, is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which benefits such as payout of medals, replay (replay) operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called “losing” Such a thing is provided.

  Subsequently, after the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated, when the player presses the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R, the reel stop control means (main CPU 93 to be described later) And the timing at which the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are pressed are controlled to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are pressed. . In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding symbols (frames)”, and the maximum number is equal to four symbols (maximum The number of sliding pieces).

  However, in the MB (a continuous action device for type 2 special feature) gaming state, the corresponding reel is within a predetermined time of 75 ms from when at least one of the plurality of stop buttons is pressed. Control to stop the rotation of is performed.

  The reel stop control means displays the symbol combination as much as possible along the winning line using the specified time when an internal winning combination permitting display of the symbol combination related to winning is determined. Thus, the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces.

  On the other hand, for combinations of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination, the range of maximum number of sliding symbols is used so that they are not displayed along the winning line using the specified time. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped.

  Thus, when the rotation of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R is all stopped, the winning determination means (main CPU 93 to be described later) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed along the winning line relates to winning. Determine whether or not.

  That is, the winning determination means determines whether the winning combination is established or not based on the combination of symbols stopped on the winning line, based on the fact that the change of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means.

  When it is determined that the prize is related to a prize, a bonus such as a medal payout is given to the player.

  A series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot machine 1.

  In the present embodiment, the first stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R) of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R performed when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating is the first. The stop operation performed after the stop operation and the first stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed after the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

  Also, in the pachislot machine 1, in the above-described series of flows, video display performed by a display device such as the liquid crystal display device 11, light output performed by various lamps (LEDs 82 and 85 described later), speakers 58 and 64, Various effects are performed using the output of sound (such as sound effects and BGM) performed by 65L and 65R, or a combination thereof.

  When the player operates the start lever 23, in addition to the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination, other lottery processing and a random number value for production (hereinafter referred to as a random number value for production) are extracted. Is done.

  When the effect random number is extracted, the effect content determination means (sub CPU 102 described later) determines by lottery what is to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination.

  When the production contents are determined, the production execution means determines whether or not there is a prize when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is started and when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped. The execution of the production is advanced in conjunction with each opportunity such as when it is broken.

  As described above, the pachislot machine 1 provides the player with an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination, that is, the combination of symbols to be aimed, by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination. Thus, the player's interest in the game is improved.

[Pachislot structure]
The functional flow of the pachislot machine 1 has been described above. Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

<External structure of pachislot>
FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

  The pachi-slot machine 1 is a gaming machine that uses a game medium such as a coin or a medal, a game ball, a token, or the like, or a game medium such as a card that stores information on a game value assigned to a player. However, in the following description, medals are used.

  The exterior body 2 of the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a cabinet 2a that houses reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable. Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a. The handle 7 is a concave portion to be put on when carrying the pachislot machine 1.

  Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

  An upper panel unit 10 and a liquid crystal display device 11 are provided above the center of the front door 2b. The upper panel unit 10 forms the upper part of the front door 2b. The upper panel unit 10 has a light source, and performs an effect by light emitted from the light source. The liquid crystal display device 11 is disposed on the lower side of the upper panel unit 10 and executes, for example, an effect by displaying an image as an effect display by an image. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 11 displays three variable symbols as decorative symbols displayed side by side on the liquid crystal display device 11 in conjunction with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Thus, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 11 constitutes an image display unit.

  A pedestal 12 is formed in the center of the front door 2b. The pedestal unit 12 is provided with a symbol display area 4 and various devices to be operated by the player.

  The symbol display area 4 is arranged on the front side superimposed on the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front, and is provided corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration capable of transmitting through the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the symbol display area 4. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

  When the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 stop rotating, the reel display window 4 displays a reel display among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. One symbol (three in total) is displayed in each of the upper, middle and lower regions within the frame of the window 4. That is, the reel display window 4 displays a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel display window 4 in the present embodiment constitutes symbol display means.

  In the present embodiment, the pachi-slot machine 1 is formed by combining any one of predetermined areas among the three regions including the upper, middle, and lower stages facing the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R of the reel display window 4. A pseudo line is defined as a line (winning line) that is a target for determining whether or not a prize has been won.

  The reel display window 4 is formed by a frame member 13 provided on the pedestal portion 12. The frame member 13 has a reel display window 4, an information display window 14, and a stop button attachment portion 15.

  The information display window 14 is provided continuously below the reel display window 4 and opens upward. That is, the reel display window 4 and the information display window 14 are formed as one continuous opening. The reel display window 4 and the information display window 14 are covered with a transparent window cover 16.

  The window cover 16 is disposed on the inner surface side of the frame member 13 and cannot be removed from the front side of the front door 2b. In addition, the frame member 13 includes a sheet placement portion 17 that faces the opening of the information display window 14 with the window cover 16 interposed therebetween. And between the sheet | seat mounting part 17 and the window cover 16, the sheet | seat member (information sheet) in which the information regarding a game was described is arrange | positioned. Therefore, the information sheet is covered with the window cover 16 having a smooth surface without unevenness or gaps.

  Since the window cover 16 constituting the information sheet arrangement portion is a non-removable front surface of the front door 2b and has a smooth surface with no irregularities or gaps, the information sheet arrangement portion is used to make a pachislot machine. It is possible to prevent an illegal act of accessing the inside of 1. The exchange of information sheets will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the information display window 14 is formed as one opening that is continuous with the reel display window 4. However, the information display window 14 may be provided below the reel display window 4. It may not be continuous. That is, the reel display window 4 and the information display window 14 may be formed as two openings arranged in the vertical direction.

  The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided below the information display window 14 and is formed on a plane facing the front. The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided with a through hole through which the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R pass. The stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are associated with the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, respectively, and are provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are referred to as a left stop button 19L, a middle stop button 19C, and a right stop button 19R, respectively.

  The stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are one of various devices that are to be operated by the player. Other various devices that are to be operated by the player include a medal slot 21, a BET button 22, A start lever 23 is provided.

  The medal slot 21 is provided to accept a medal dropped from the outside by the player. The medals accepted by the medal slot 21 are inserted into one game with a predetermined number as the upper limit, and the amount exceeding the specified number can be deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. (So-called credit function).

  The BET button 22 is provided for determining the number of coins to be inserted into one game from medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. The start lever 23 is provided to start the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  Further, a 7-segment display 24 composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 when viewed from the front. The 7-segment display 24 provides information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits), and the like. Is digitally displayed.

  Side panel units 26 </ b> L and 26 </ b> R are provided on both sides of the pedestal portion 12. Each of the side panel units 26L and 26R has a light source, and performs an effect by light emitted from the light source. A settlement button 27 is provided below the side panel unit 26L. The settlement button 27 is provided to pull out medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

  A lower panel unit 31 is provided below the pedestal 12. The waist panel unit 31 has a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source that emits light for illuminating from the back side of the decorative panel.

  Below the waist panel unit 31, a medal payout port 32, speaker holes 33L and 33R, and a medal tray unit 34 are provided. The medal payout port 32 guides medals discharged by driving a medal payout device 51 (hereinafter also referred to as a hopper device 51) described later to the outside. The medals discharged from the medal payout opening 32 are stored in the medal tray unit 34. The speaker holes 33L and 33R are provided to output sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the performance.

<Internal structure of pachislot>
3 and 4 are perspective views showing the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1. FIG. FIG. 3 shows a state where the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 provided on the back side of the front door 2b is closed with respect to the front door 2b. FIG. 4 shows a state where the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 is opened with respect to the front door 2b.

  FIG. 5 is a front view showing the inside of the cabinet 2a. FIG. 6 is a front view showing the back side of the front door 2b.

  The cabinet 2a includes a top plate 20a, a bottom plate 20b, left and right side plates 20c and 20d, and a back plate 20e (see FIG. 5). A cabinet-side speaker 42 is disposed on the upper side inside the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side speaker 42 is attached to the back plate 20e of the cabinet 2a via attachment brackets 43L and 43R. The cabinet side speaker 42 is, for example, a speaker for outputting sound effects.

  A cabinet-side relay board 44 is disposed on the left side of the cabinet-side speaker 42 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, attached to the middle door 41 (see FIGS. 3 and 4), a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, and a medal payout count. It relays the wiring connecting the switch (not shown) and the external concentration terminal board 47.

  An external concentrated terminal plate 47 is disposed on the right side of the amplifier board 45 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The external concentration terminal board 47 is provided for outputting signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

  A sub power supply device 48 is disposed on the left side of the amplifier board 45 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The sub power supply device 48 is attached to the left side plate 20c of the cabinet 2a. The sub power supply device 48 supplies power with an AC voltage of 100 V to the power supply device 53 described later. Further, the power of the AC voltage 100V is converted into the power of the DC voltage and supplied to the amplifier board 45.

  A hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are disposed below the inside of the cabinet 2a.

  The hopper device 51 is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 20b in the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 can store a large amount of medals and can discharge them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds 50, for example, or when the settlement button 27 is pressed to settle the medals. The medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout port 32 (see FIG. 2).

  The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is disposed on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is engaged with the bottom plate 20b of the cabinet 2a, and is configured to be detachable from the bottom plate 20b.

  The power supply device 53 includes a power switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (see FIG. 7). The power supply device 53 is disposed on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side plate 20c. The power supply device 53 converts the power of the AC voltage 100V supplied from the sub power supply device 48 into the power of the DC voltage necessary for each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

  As shown in FIGS. 3, 4 and 6, the middle door 41 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the front door 2b, and is configured to open and close the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 4) from the back side. Door stoppers 41a, 41b, and 41c are provided at the upper and lower portions of the middle door 41. The door stoppers 41a, 41b and 41c fix (prohibit) the opening operation of the middle door 41 in a state where the reel display window 4 is closed from the back side. That is, in order to open the middle door 41, it is necessary to rotate the door stoppers 41a, 41b, 41c to release the middle door 41 from being fixed.

  A main control board case 55 that houses a main control board 71 (see FIG. 7) and three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are attached to the middle door 41. A stepping motor (not shown) is connected to each of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R via gears having a predetermined reduction ratio.

  As shown in FIG. 4, in the pachislot machine 1, when the middle door 41 is opened, the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placing portion 17 are exposed.

  As described above, between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17, an information sheet on which information related to the game is described is arranged. The information sheet is inserted into a gap formed between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17 in a state where the middle door 41 is opened and the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17 are exposed. Also, in the pachislot machine 1, when exchanging information sheets, the information sheet is exchanged after the middle door 41 is opened.

  The main control board case 55 is provided with a setting key type switch 56. The setting key switch 56 is used when changing the setting of the pachislot machine 1 or confirming the setting of the pachislot machine 1.

  A main control board 71 (see FIG. 7) housed in the main control board case 55 constitutes a main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8) described later. The main control circuit 91 is a main game in the pachislot machine 1 such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, determination of presence / absence of winning, transition of a main game state (game state) described later. A circuit for controlling the flow. That is, the main control circuit 91 controls the gaming state related to the progress of the game.

  Specifically, the main control circuit 91 includes a main CPU 93 (see FIG. 8) that executes each control as described above. The main CPU 93 detects a start operation by the start switch 79, and a plurality of which will be described later. The internal winning combination is determined with a predetermined probability from among the roles. The main CPU 93 that performs such control constitutes an internal winning combination determining means.

  Further, the main CPU 93 controls the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R based on the detection of the start operation by the start switch 79 to rotate the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, thereby rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. The symbol displayed on 3R is changed. The main CPU 93 that performs such control constitutes symbol variation means.

  Further, the main CPU 93 detects a stop operation by the internal winning combination determined as described above and stop switches 80L, 80C, 80R (left stop switch 80L, middle stop switch 80C, right stop switch 80R) described later. Based on the timing, the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, thereby stopping the variation of the symbols displayed on the reel display window 4. The main CPU 93 that performs such control constitutes a reel stop control means.

  Further, the main CPU 93 receives the winning or non-winning of the combination based on the combination of symbols stopped on the winning line provided on the reel display window 4 when the variation of each symbol is stopped as described above. Determine. The main CPU 93 that performs such control constitutes a winning determination means.

  Further, the main CPU 93 has a general gaming state (RT0 gaming state) as a normal state where the probability that a replay related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is low, and a probability that a replay is determined as an internal winning combination is a general gaming state. Control of the transition of the main gaming state between the RT1 gaming state as a higher high RT gaming state. The main CPU 93 that performs such control constitutes a game state transition control means.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the main control board case 55 and the main control board 71 constitute a main control board unit. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described later.

  A sub control board case 57 that houses the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 7) is disposed above the middle door 41. The sub control board 72 housed in the sub control board case 57 constitutes the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9). The sub-control circuit 101 is a circuit that controls execution of effects by displaying images. That is, the sub-control circuit 101 controls the effect state related to the game. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 101 will be described later. In the following description, the effect state is also referred to as a secondary game state.

  A center speaker 58 is disposed above the sub control board case 57. A fan 59 is disposed on the left side of the center speaker 58 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. That is, the fan 59 is disposed at the upper part on the back side of the front door 2b. The fan 59 blows air downward to cool the interior of the pachislot machine 1.

  A sub relay board 61 is disposed on the right side of the sub control board case 57 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. The sub relay board 61 relays the wiring connecting the sub control board 72 and the main control board 71. Further, it is a board that relays the wiring that connects the sub-control board 72 and the board disposed around the sub-control board 72. In addition, as a board | substrate arrange | positioned around the sub control board | substrate 72, LED board 62A, 62B mentioned later is mentioned.

  The LED boards 62A and 62B are disposed above the sub control board case 57 when viewed from the back side of the front door 2b. The LED boards 62A and 62B display a blinking pattern by causing an LED 85 (see FIG. 7) showing a specific example of the light source to emit light according to an effect executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9). .

  In the present embodiment, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a plurality of LED boards in addition to the LED boards 62A and 62B.

  Below the sub-relay board 61, a 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 is disposed. The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 stores the opening / closing history of the middle door 41. The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error on the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 101) when the middle door 41 is opened.

  Below the middle door 41, a board speaker 64 and lower speakers 65L and 65R are arranged. The board speaker 64 faces the waist panel unit 31 (see FIG. 2). The lower speakers 65L and 65R face the speaker holes 33L and 33R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

  A selector 66 and a door open / close monitoring switch 67 are disposed above the lower speaker 65L. The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the medal material and shape are appropriate, and guides an appropriate medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 to the hopper device 51. A medal sensor (not shown) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 66.

  The door open / close monitoring switch 67 is arranged on the left side of the selector 66 when viewed from the back side of the front door 2b. The door open / close monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

  Further, a door relay terminal plate 68 is disposed below the reel display window 4 and in an area opened and closed by the middle door 41 (see FIG. 4). The door relay terminal board 68 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 7) in the main control board case 55, various buttons and switches, a sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 7), a selector 66, and a game operation display board 81 ( FIG. 7) is a substrate that relays the wiring.

  Here, examples of the various buttons and switches include a BET button 22, a settlement button 27, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77 (described later), a start switch 79 (described later), and the like.

[Control system for pachislot machines]
Next, a control system provided in the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a control system of the pachislot machine 1.

  The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 disposed on the middle door 41 and a sub-control board 72 disposed on the front door 2b.

  The main control board 71 includes a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key-type switch 56, an external concentration terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, and a power board 53b of the power unit 53. , Is connected. The external concentration terminal board 47, the hopper device 51 and the medal auxiliary storage switch 75 are connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet-side relay board 44. Here, since the external concentration terminal board 47 and the hopper device 51 have been described above, description thereof will be omitted.

  The reel relay terminal board 74 is disposed inside the reel body of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal board 74 is electrically connected to stepping motors (not shown) of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and relays signals output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motors.

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 penetrates a later-described switch through hole of the medal auxiliary storage 52. The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals.

  A power switch 53 a is connected to the power supply board 53 b of the power supply device 53. The power switch 53a is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1.

  The main control board 71 has a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, a settlement switch 78, a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, and a door relay terminal board 68. The game operation display board 81 and the sub relay board 61 are connected. Here, since the selector 66, the door opening / closing monitoring switch 67, and the sub relay board 61 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

  The BET switch 77 detects that the BET button 22 has been pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button 27 has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 detects that the start lever 23 has been operated by the player (start operation). That is, the start switch 79 constitutes a start operation detecting unit that detects a start operation by the player.

  The stop switch substrate 80 is a substrate constituting a circuit for stopping the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a circuit for displaying a stopable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch board 80 is provided with stop switches 80L, 80C, 80R corresponding to the respective stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R. The stop switches 80L, 80C, 80R detect that the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are pressed (stop operation) by the player. That is, the stop switches 80L, 80C, 80R constitute stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation for stopping the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  The game operation display board 81 displays the number of inserted medals in 7 segments when accepting insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R can be rotated and when replaying is performed. This is a substrate to be displayed on the device 24. The 7-segment display 24 and the LED 82 are connected to the game operation display board 81. The LED 82 lights, for example, a mark for displaying the start of a game, a mark for performing a replay, and the like.

  The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub relay board 61. A sound I / O board 84, LED boards 62A and 62B, and a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 are connected to the sub control board 72 via a sub relay board 61. Here, since the LED boards 62A and 62B and the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

  The sound I / O board 84 outputs audio to the cabinet side speaker 42, the center speaker 58, the board speaker 64, the lower speakers 65L and 65R, and a speaker (not shown) provided on the front door 2b. .

  Further, a ROM cartridge substrate 86 and a liquid crystal relay substrate 87 are connected to the sub control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 and the liquid crystal relay substrate 87 are housed in the sub control board case 57 together with the sub control board 72.

  The ROM cartridge substrate 86 is a substrate for managing production images (video), sound, LED substrates 62A and 62B and other LED substrates (not shown), and communication data. The liquid crystal relay substrate 87 is a substrate that relays wiring that connects the sub-control board 72 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

[Main control circuit]
Next, the main control circuit 91 constituted by the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 8 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachislot machine 1.

  The main control circuit 91 includes a microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 71 as a main component. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

  The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  The main CPU 93 is connected to a clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99.

  The main CPU 93 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R after detecting the reel index. Thereby, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated).

  Here, the reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. The reel index is provided, for example, at a predetermined position of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit by the rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. It is detected by a reel position detector (not shown) provided with an intervening detection piece.

  Next, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 manages the symbol counter to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the pachi-slot machine 1 sets the maximum number of sliding symbols to 4 symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 19L is pressed, the symbol of the left reel 3L in the middle of the reel display window 4 and each symbol within the range from the symbol to the four symbols ahead are displayed on the reel display window 4. It becomes a symbol that can be stopped in the middle.

[Sub control circuit]
Next, the sub control circuit 101 constituted by the sub control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sub control circuit 101 of the pachislot machine 1.

  The sub control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91 and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

  The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 in accordance with a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  The sub CPU 102 uses an image (including both a still image and a moving image) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 based on a command related to detection of a start operation by the start switch 79 among commands transmitted from the main control circuit 91. An effect display that is an effect is controlled. Thus, the sub CPU 102 constitutes an image display control unit.

  A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. The control program includes, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91 and an effect registration task for extracting effect random numbers and determining and registering effect contents (effect data). Is included. Further, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 7) based on the determined contents of the effect, a lamp control task for controlling light output by a light source such as the LED 85, and the speakers 42, 58, 64. , 65L, 65R, etc., a voice control task for controlling the sound output from the speaker.

  The data storage area is a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing presentation data constituting each presentation content, a storage area for storing animation data relating to video creation, and sound data relating to BGM and sound effects. And a storage area for storing lamp data related to the light on / off pattern.

  The sub-RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined contents and effects data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

  The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create a video according to the animation data designated by the contents of the presentation, and display the created video on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 causes a sound such as BGM to be output from speakers such as speakers 42, 58, 64, 65L, and 65R in accordance with the sound data specified by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the turning on and off of the light source such as the LED 85 according to the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

[Various data tables on the main control side (main side)]
10 to 36 show various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 (see FIG. 8).

<Pattern arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 10 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between 21 symbol positions (symbol position data) “0” to “20” and symbols corresponding to these symbol positions “0” to “20”.

  Symbol positions “0” to “20” indicate the positions of symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “20” can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  The types of symbols are “White BAR”, “Red BAR”, “Blue BAR”, “Pupil”, “Green Lip”, “Purple Lip”, “Blue Lip”, “Yellow Lip”, “Red Lip” , And "Vermilion Lip".

  The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 10 assigns the symbol located in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 (the symbol passing through the middle stage of the reel display window 4) to the symbol position “0” when the reel index is detected. A correspondence relationship in which symbol positions “0” to “20” are assigned to each of the 21 symbols in the order of movement in the rotation direction of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is defined.

  In this way, by using the middle stage of the reel display window 4 as a reference, the type of symbol positioned in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Design code table>
As shown in FIG. 11, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table, and is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 11 represents codes for specifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  As described above, the symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are “white BAR”, “red BAR”, “blue BAR”, “pupil symbol”, “green lip”, “purple lip”, “blue”. There are 10 types of “lip”, “yellow lip”, “red lip”, and “red lip”.

  In the symbol code table, “00000001” is assigned as data to the symbol “symbol code 1” of “white BAR”. “00000010” is assigned as data to the “red BAR” symbol (symbol code 2). “00000011” is assigned as data to the “blue BAR” symbol (symbol code 3).

  Similarly, for the “pupil symbol”, “green lip”, “purple lip”, “blue lip”, “yellow lip”, “red lip”, and “red lip” symbols (symbol codes 4 to 10) However, “00000100” to “0000001010” are assigned as data.

<Internal winning combination determination table for small role / replay>
In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 12, the internal winning combination (small winning combination) that allows the display of the combination of symbols related to the payout of medals is displayed for the small winning combination / replay data pointer, An internal winning combination (replay combination) that allows display of a combination of symbols related to the operation of the game is associated.

  The internal winning combination is determined according to the small combination / replay data pointers “0” to “51” (however, when the small combination / replay data pointer is “0”, it is “lost” (When the data pointer for replay is “51”, the internal winning combination is “F_MB”).

  In this table, when the small role / replay data pointer is “1”, it means that “F_normal lip 1” is internally won.

  For example, “F_normal lip 1” indicates “C_white simple XX” and “C_center red BC” as shown in a comparison table (see FIGS. 14 to 17) of the internal winning combination and winning combination described later. ”,“ C_Red Ten × ○○ ”,“ C_Red Single ×× ○ ”,“ C_Red Single × ○ × 1 ”,“ C_Red Single × ○ × 2 ”, and“ C_Center Blue BC ” ”,“ C_blue ten ×× ○ ”,“ C_blue single ×× ○ ”,“ C_blue single × ○ × 1 ”,“ C_blue single ××× 2 ”, and“ C_center red different color ” BC ”,“ C_red different color ten × ○○ ”,“ C_center blue different color BC ”,“ C_blue different color ten × XX ”,“ C_pupil ”, and“ C_pupil tenth ”. ”,“ C_pupilation ten × XX1 ”,“ C_pupilation ten × XX2 ”,“ C_pupilation single ×× ○ 1 ”, and“ C_pupilation single ×× ○ 2 ” , “C_Normal Lip 1”, “C_Normal Lip 2”, “C_ Lip 3 ”,“ C_Normal Lip 4 ”,“ C_Normal Lip 5 ”,“ C_Normal Lip 6 ”,“ C_Normal Lip 7 ”,“ C_Normal Lip 8 ”, and“ C_Normal Lip 9 ” ”,“ C_normal lip 10 ”,“ C_normal lip 11 ”, and“ C_normal lip 12 ”are overlapped internally.

  Here, the small combination / replay data pointer “1” is a combination in which the winning combination is duplicated (duplicate combination). In the following description, for convenience, the internal pointer corresponding to the small combination / replay data pointer “1” is used. The winning role is described as “F_Normal Lip 1” by the name described in the remarks column.

  As for the small combination / replay data pointers “2” to “51”, the contents of the internal winning combination are shown in the comparison table of the internal winning combination and winning combination shown in FIGS. The detailed description is omitted here, and is described by the name described in the remarks column of FIG. 12, as in the case of the small role / replay data pointer “1”.

  For example, in the small combination / replay data pointers “2” to “4”, the internal winning combination is “F_normal rep 2 to 4”. Here, “F_normal lip 2” is also referred to as an internal winning combination “BAR loss” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later. Further, “F_normal lip 3” and “F_normal lip 4” are also referred to as an internal winning combination “added BAR” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 to be described later. Further, “F_normal lip 1” described above is also described as an internal winning combination “BAR alignment” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later.

  Further, in the following description, “F_normal lip 1 to 4” are collectively referred to as normal replay. In addition, the normal replay is an internal winning combination that triggers the transition of the sub game state from the sub game state controlled by the sub control circuit 101 to the pseudo bonus state. Also described as a transitional role.

  Further, the small winning combination / replay data pointers “5” to “7” have the internal winning combination “F_Scroll Lips 1 to 3”. Here, “F_Scroll Lips 1 to 3” are also described as an internal winning combination “chance replay” (special replay combination) in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later.

  In addition, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “8” has the internal winning combination “F_Premier Lip”. Here, “F_Premier Lip” is also referred to as an internal winning combination “Premier Flag” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later.

  In addition, the small character / replay data pointers “9” to “17” have the internal winning combination “F_middle left / right bells 1 to 9”, and the small character / replay data pointers “18” to “26” have the internal winning combinations. The role is “F_middle right / left bell 1-9”, and the small role / replay data pointers “27” to “35” are “F_middle right bell 1-9” for the small role / replay. The data pointers “36” to “44” have an internal winning combination of “F_right middle left bell 1-9”, which is a so-called push order bell combination, and constitutes a predetermined internal winning combination in the present embodiment.

  In addition, the data pointer “45” for the small combination / replay has the internal winning combination “F_common bell”. Here, “F_common bell” is also referred to as an internal winning combination “common bell” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later.

  In addition, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “46” has the internal winning combination “F_weak cherry”. Here, “F_weak cherry” is also referred to as an internal winning combination “weak cherry” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later.

  In addition, the data pointer “47” for the small role / replay has the internal winning combination “F_strong cherry”. Here, “F_strong cherry” is also described as an internal winning combination “strong cherry” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later.

  In addition, in the data pointers “48” to “50” for the small combination / replay, the internal winning combination is “F_chance combination 1 to 3”. Here, “F_chance combination 1 to 3” is also described as an internal winning combination “chance” in each lottery process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 described later.

  The small / replay data pointers “0” to “51” are stored in the main ROM 94 as a data table. The table is composed of seven internal winning combination storing area data “0” to “6” each consisting of 1-byte data. For example, the small combination / replay data pointer “0” is associated with bit 0 of the internal winning combination storing area data “0”. The small combination / replay data pointer “1” is associated with bit 1 of the internal winning combination storing area data “0”. Similarly, the small combination / replay data pointer “50” is associated with bit 2 of the internal winning combination storage area data “6”.

<Bonus internal winning combination determination table>
In the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 13, the bonus data pointer is associated with an internal winning combination that allows display of a combination of symbols related to the operation of the bonus.

  In this table, the bonus data pointer is assigned with “0” corresponding to the loss and “1” corresponding to the F_CB combination in the MB gaming state. When the bonus data pointer is “1”, it means that “F_MB” has been won internally. This “F_MB” is a so-called predetermined bonus combination.

<Comparison table of internal winning roles and winning roles>
FIG. 14 to FIG. 17 are diagrams showing the correspondence relationship of winning combinations established in each internal winning combination.

  In FIG. 14 to FIG. 17, an internal winning combination with “◯” is a winning combination that may be established in each internal winning combination. For example, when the internal winning combination is “F_normal lip 1”, “C_white simple XX”, “C_center red BC”, “C_red ten × XX”, “ “C_red single ×× ○”, “C_red single ××× 1”, “C_red single ××× 2”, “C_center blue BC”, “C_blue ten ×× ○”, “C_blue single ××” “O”, “C_blue single × ○ × 1”, “C_blue single ××× 2”, “C_center red different color BC”, “C_red different color ten × XX”, “C_center blue different color BC”, “ C_Blue Different Color Ten × ○○, “C_Pupilation”, “C_Pupilation Ten × ○○”, “C_Pupilation Ten × XX1”, “C_Pupilation Ten × XX2”, “C_Pupil” Surgery ×× ○ 1 ”,“ C_Eye Surgery ×× ○ 2 ”,“ C_Normal Lip 1 ”,“ C_Normal Lip 2 ”,“ C_Normal Lip 3 ”,“ C_Normal Lip 4 ”,“ C_Normal Lip 5 ”,“ C_Normal Lip 6 ”,“ C One of “normal lip 7”, “C_normal lip 8”, “C_normal lip 9”, “C_normal lip 10”, “C_normal lip 11”, and “C_normal lip 12” is established as a winning combination. Have potential.

<Internal symbol combination table>
FIGS. 18 to 21 are symbol combination tables of internal winning combinations showing the relationship between the combination (combination) of symbols won by each internal winning combination and the number of medals to be paid out when winning each internal winning combination.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 21, combinations of symbols won by each internal winning combination are stored in the main ROM 94 as a data table. The table is composed of 26-byte data (storage area types) “0” to “25” each consisting of 1-byte data.

  18 to 21, the combination means a symbol combination (winning combination) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4 when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R stops. . In addition, the names of each winning combination come from a combination.

  For example, when the internal winning combination is “F_normal lip 1” and the “green lip-blue lip-white BAR” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is the middle stage of the left reel 3L. “C_white single XX” is displayed by displaying “white BAR” only in the middle stage of the right reel 3R, excluding the middle stage of the middle reel 3C. The winning combination “C_white simple XX” is associated with bit 6 of data (storage area type) “1”.

  In addition, when “red BAR-red BAR-red BAR” is displayed in the middle row of the reel display window 4, “red BAR” is displayed in the middle row of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Therefore, “C_center red BC” is set. The winning combination “C_center red BC” is associated with bit 5 of data (storage area type) “1”.

  In addition, when “green lip-red BAR-red BAR” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the winning combination names are those of the middle stage of the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R except for the middle stage of the left reel 3L. “C_Red Ten × XX” is displayed by displaying “Red BAR” in the middle stage. The winning combination “C_Red Ten × XX” is associated with bit 5 of data (storage area type) “2”.

  Further, when “green lip-blue lip-red BAR” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the winning combination names are the right reel 3R excluding the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the middle reel 3C. Since “red BAR” is displayed only in the middle stage, “C_red single XX” is indicated. The winning combination “C_red simple xx” is associated with bit 4 of data (storage area type) “2”.

  Further, when “green lip-red BAR-yellow lip” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the winning combination names are the middle reel 3R excluding the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the right reel 3C. Since “red BAR” is displayed only in the middle row, “C_red single × ◯ × 1” is set. The winning combination “C_red single × O × 1” is associated with bit 3 of data (storage area type) “2”.

  Further, when “green lip-red BAR-red lip” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is the middle reel 3R excluding the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the right reel 3C. Since “red BAR” is displayed only in the middle stage, “C_red single × ◯ × 2” is distinguished from the above “C_red single × ◯ × 1”. The winning combination “C_red single × ◯ × 2” is associated with bit 2 of data (storage area type) “2”.

  In addition, when “blue BAR-blue BAR-blue BAR” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, “blue BAR” is displayed in the middle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Therefore, “C_center blue BC” is obtained. The winning combination “C_center blue BC” is associated with bit 1 of data (storage area type) “2”.

  Further, when “green lip-blue BAR-blue BAR” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the winning combination names are those of the middle stage of the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R except for the middle stage of the left reel 3L. By displaying “blue BAR” in the middle stage, “C_blue ten × XX” is displayed. The winning combination “C_blue ten × XX” is associated with bit 3 of data (storage area type) “3”.

  Further, when “green lip-blue lip-blue BAR” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the winning combination names are the right reel 3R excluding the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the middle reel 3C. Since “blue BAR” is displayed only in the middle row, “C_blue simple XX” is indicated. The winning combination “C_blue simple xx” is associated with bit 2 of data (storage area type) “3”.

  Further, when “green lip-blue BAR-yellow lip” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the winning combination names are the middle reel 3R excluding the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the right reel 3C. Since “blue BAR” is displayed only in the middle row, “C_blue only × ○ × 1” is set. This winning combination “C_blue simple × O × 1” is associated with bit 1 of data (storage area type) “3”.

  In addition, when “green lip-blue BAR-red lip” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is the middle reel 3R excluding the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the right reel 3C. By displaying “blue BAR” only in the middle row, “C_blue single × ◯ × 2” is distinguished from the above “C_blue single × ◯ × 1”. This winning combination “C_blue simple × O × 2” is associated with bit 0 of data (storage area type) “3”.

  Further, when “red BAR-red BAR-blue BAR” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is “red BAR” in the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, respectively. Is displayed, and “blue BAR” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, so that “C_center red different color BC” is set based on “red BAR”. The winning combination “C_center red different color BC” is associated with bit 7 of data (storage area type) “4”.

  The name of the winning combination when “green lip-red BAR-blue BAR” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4 is “red BAR” in the middle of the middle reel 3C except for the middle of the left reel 3L. Is displayed, and “blue BAR” is displayed in the middle stage of the right reel 3R, so that “C_red different color ten × ◯◯” is set based on “red BAR”. The winning combination “C_red different color ten × XX” is associated with bit 5 of data (storage area type) “4”.

  Further, when “blue BAR-blue BAR-red BAR” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the winning combination names are “blue BAR” in the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, respectively. Is displayed, and “red BAR” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, so that “C_center blue different color BC” is set based on “blue BAR”. The winning combination “C_center blue different color BC” is associated with bit 4 of data (storage area type) “4”.

  Further, when “green lip-blue BAR-red BAR” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is “blue BAR” in the middle of the middle reel 3C except for the middle of the left reel 3L. Is displayed, and “red BAR” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, so that “C_blue different color ten × ◯◯” is set based on “blue BAR”. The winning combination “C_blue different color ten × XX” is associated with bit 2 of data (storage area type) “4”.

  The name of the winning combination when “red BAR-pupil pattern-pupil pattern” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4 is displayed as “red BAR” in the middle of the left reel 3L. By displaying “pupil designs” on the middle stage and the middle stage of the right reel 3R, “C_pupilation” is set based on the “pupil designs”. The winning combination “C_pupil” is associated with bit 1 of data (storage area type) “4”.

  The name of the winning combination when “red BAR-yellow lip-pupil pattern” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4 is displayed as “red BAR” in the middle of the left reel 3L. “Yellow Lip” is displayed in the middle stage, and “Pupil Design” is displayed in the middle stage of the right reel 3R, so that “C_Eye Art Ten ○○○” is based on the “Pupil Design”. The winning combination “C_pupil tentacle XX” is associated with bit 0 of data (storage area type) “4”.

  The name of the winning combination when “green lip-pupil pattern-pupil pattern” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4 is displayed as “green lip” in the middle of the left reel 3L. “Pupil design” is displayed on the middle stage and the middle stage of the right reel 3R, respectively, so that “C_pupilation ten × ○○ 1” is based on the “pupil design”. The winning combination “C_pupilation ten × XX1” is associated with bit 7 of data (storage area type) “5”.

  The name of the winning combination when “red lip-pupil symbol-pupil symbol” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4 is displayed as “red lip” in the middle of the left reel 3L. By displaying “pupil design” on the middle stage and the middle stage of the right reel 3R respectively, the “C_pupilation tenth” is distinguished from the above “C_pupilation ten × XX1” on the basis of the “pupil design”. × XX2 ”. The winning combination “C_pupilation ten × XX2” is associated with bit 6 of data (storage area type) “5”.

  The name of the winning combination when “green lip-blue lip-pupil pattern” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4 is displayed as “green lip” in the middle of the left reel 3L. “Blue Lip” is displayed in the middle, and “Pupil Design” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, so that “C_Eye Art Single XX 1” is based on the “Pupil Design”. The winning combination “C_pupil single xxx 1” is associated with bit 5 of data (storage area type) “5”.

  Further, the name of the winning combination when “red lip-blue lip-pupil pattern” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4 is displayed as “red lip” in the middle of the left reel 3L. “Blue Lip” is displayed in the middle, and “Pupil Design” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, so that it is distinguished from the above “C_Eye Art Single XX ○ 1” based on the “Pupil Design”. , “C_pupil surgery single xx 2”. The winning combination “C_pupil single xx 2” is associated with bit 4 of data (storage area type) “5”.

  In addition, when “blue lip-green lip-yellow lip” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L, and the name of the middle reel 3C. “Clip Normal Lip 1” is displayed by displaying “Green Lip” in the middle row and “Yellow Lip” in the middle row of the right reel 3R. The winning combination “C_normal lip 1” is associated with bit 2 of data (storage area type) “6”.

  Further, when “blue lip-green lip-red lip” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is displayed as “blue lip” in the middle of the left reel 3L. “Clip Normal Lip 2” is displayed by displaying “Green Lip” in the middle row and “Red Lip” in the middle row of the right reel 3R. The winning combination “C_normal lip 2” is associated with bit 1 of data (storage area type) “6”.

  Further, when “blue lip-blue lip-yellow lip” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the winning combination names are “blue lip” in the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, respectively. Is displayed, and “Yellow Lip” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, thereby “C_Normal Lip 3”. The winning combination “C_normal lip 3” is associated with bit 0 of data (storage area type) “6”.

  Further, when “blue lip-blue lip-red lip” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the winning combination names are “blue lip” in the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, respectively. Is displayed, and “red lip” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, thereby setting “C_normal lip 4”. The winning combination “C_normal lip 4” is associated with bit 7 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  Further, when “green lip-green lip-yellow lip” is displayed in the middle part of the reel display window 4, the winning combination names are “green lip” in the middle part of the left reel 3L and the middle part of the middle reel 3C, respectively. Is displayed, and “yellow lip” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, thereby setting “C_normal lip 5”. The winning combination “C_normal lip 5” is associated with bit 6 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  In addition, when “green lip-green lip-red lip” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the winning combination names are “green lip” in the middle stage of the left reel 3L and the middle stage of the middle reel 3C, respectively. Is displayed, and “red lip” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, thereby setting “C_normal lip 6”. The winning combination “C_normal lip 6” is associated with bit 5 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  Further, when “green lip-red lip-yellow lip” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is displayed in the middle stage of the left reel 3L, and the middle reel 3C “Red lip” is displayed in the middle row, and “yellow lip” is displayed in the middle row of the right reel 3R, thereby setting “C_normal lip 7”. The winning combination “C_normal lip 7” is associated with bit 4 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  In addition, the name of the winning combination when “green lip-red lip-red lip” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, “green lip” is displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L, and the middle reel 3C “Red lip” is displayed in the middle, and “red lip” is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R, thereby setting “C_normal lip 8”. The winning combination “C_normal lip 8” is associated with bit 3 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  Further, the name of the winning combination when “green lip-red lip-yellow lip” is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 is displayed as “green lip” in the middle stage of the left reel 3L. “Clip normal lip 9” is displayed by displaying “red lip” in the middle and “yellow lip” in the middle of the right reel 3R. The winning combination “C_normal lip 9” is associated with bit 2 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  In addition, the name of the winning combination when “Green Lip-Red Lip-Red Lip” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, “Green Lip” is displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L. By displaying “red lip” on the middle stage and the middle stage of the right reel 3R, “C_normal lip 10” is obtained. The winning combination “C_normal lip 10” is associated with bit 1 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  In addition, when “green lip-purple lip-yellow lip” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, the name of the winning combination is displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L, and the name of the middle reel 3C. “Purple Lip” is displayed in the middle row, and “Yellow Lip” is displayed in the middle row of the right reel 3R, thereby setting “C_Normal Lip 11”. The winning combination “C_normal lip 11” is associated with bit 0 of data (storage area type) “7”.

  In addition, the name of the winning combination when “green lip-purple lip-red lip” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, “green lip” is displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L, and the middle reel 3C “Purple Lip” is displayed in the middle row, and “Red Lip” is displayed in the middle row of the right reel 3R, thereby setting “C_Normal Lip 12”. The winning combination “C_normal lip 12” is associated with bit 7 of data (storage area type) “8”.

  18 to 21 define the number of medals to be paid out when each internal winning combination wins.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 21, the combination of the internal winning combination relating to the re-game is the bit 7 to bit 0 of the data “0”, the bit 7 to bit 0 of the data “1”, and the data “2”. Bit 7 to Bit 0, Bit 7 to Bit 0 of Data “3”, Bit 7 to Bit 0 of Data “4”, Bit 7 to Bit 0 of Data “5”, and Bit of Data “6” 7 to bit 0, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “7”, and bit 7 of data “8”.

  The internal winning combination related to the re-gamer has 0 medals to be paid out at the time of winning a prize. However, when the internal winning combination related to the re-gamer wins, the game can be executed again without inserting a medal. it can.

  Bit 6 to bit 0 of data “8”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “9”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “10”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “11”, and data “ 12 ”bit 7 to bit 0, data“ 13 ”bit 7 to bit 0, data“ 14 ”bit 7 to bit 0, data“ 15 ”bit 7 to bit 0, and data“ 16 ” Bit 7 to Bit 0, Bit 7 to Bit 0 of Data “17”, Bit 7 to Bit 0 of Data “18”, Bit 7 to Bit 0 of Data “19”, and Bit of Data “20” 7 to bit 0, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “21”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “22”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “23”, and bit 7 to bit of data “24” Bit 0 and bit 7 of data “25” And bits 5, the internal winning combination of the combination of medals payout is executed, and the payout number of medals at winning each internal winning are correlated.

  Here, when each internal winning combination for which medals are paid out is multiplied by two medals, both medals are paid out. Therefore, in the following description, a case where three medals are multiplied will be described.

  In bit 0 of data “10” and bit 7 of data “11”, “C_Bell 1” and “C_Bell 2”, which are winning combinations in which a payout of 8 medals is executed as an internal winning combination, are performed. Are associated.

  Bits 6 to 0 of data “8” and bits 7 to 1 of data “9” are “C_” which is a winning combination in which two medals are paid out when winning a prize as an internal winning combination. “Normal cherries 1 to 14” are associated with each other.

  Bit 0 of data “9” and bits 7 to 1 of data “10” are “C_Chance Cherry 1” which is a winning combination in which two medals are paid out when winning a prize as an internal winning combination. ˜8 ”are associated.

  In bits 6 to 0 of data “11”, as an internal winning combination, “C_chance combination A1”, “C_chance combination A2”, “C_ “Chance combination B1”, “C_chance combination B2”, “C_chance combination C1”, and “C_chance combination C2” are associated with each other.

  Bit 0 of data “11”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “12”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “13”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “14”, and data “15” Bit 7 to bit 0 and bit 7 to bit 5 of data “16” include “C_left special × AA1” which is a winning combination in which a payout of one medal is executed at the time of winning as an internal winning combination. 4 ”,“ C_Left Special × AB1-4 ”,“ C_Left Special × AC1-4 ”,“ C_Left Special × BA1-4 ”,“ C_Left Special × BB1-4 ”,“ C_Left Special × BC1-4 ” 4 ”,“ C_left special × CA1-4 ”,“ C_left special × CB1-4 ”, and“ C_left special × CC1-4 ”are associated with each other.

  Bit 4 to bit 0 of data “16”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “17”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “18”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “19”, and data “ Bits 7 to 1 of “20” include “C_medium special A × A1 to A4”, “C_medium special A”, which are winning combinations in which a single medal is paid out at the time of winning as an internal winning combination. × B1-4 ”,“ C_Medium Special A × C1-4 ”,“ C_Medium Special B × A1-4 ”,“ C_Medium Special B × B1-4 ”,“ C_Medium Special B × C1-4 ”, “C_medium special C × A1-4”, “C_medium special C × B1-4”, and “C_medium special C × C1-4” are associated with each other.

  Bit 0 of data “20”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “21”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “22”, bit 7 to bit 0 of data “23”, and data “24” Bit 7 to bit 1 and bit 7 to bit 5 of data “25” are “C_right special AA × 1” which is a winning combination in which a single medal is paid out when winning a prize as an internal winning combination. ˜4 ”,“ C_Right Special AB × 1-4 ”,“ C_Right Special AC × 1-4 ”,“ C_Right Special BA × 1-4 ”,“ C_Right Special BB × 1-4 ”,“ C_ “Right Special BC × 1-4”, “C_Right Special CA × 1-4”, “C_Right Special CB × 1-4”, and “C_Right Special CC × 1-4” are associated with each other.

  Here, the name of the special combination (C_left special ..., C_middle special ..., C_right special ...) is the name of which of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R the first stop operation is executed on. It comes from. For example, when the winning combination is “C_left special × AA1” (see bit 0 of data “11”), the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, and “blue lip” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4. -When “Red BAR-Red BAR” is displayed, a prize is awarded. When the winning combination is “C_medium special A × A1” (see bit 4 of data “16”), the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C, and “red” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4. When “BAR-Yellow Lip-Red BAR” is displayed, a prize is awarded. When the winning combination is “C_right special AA × 1” (see bit 0 of data “20”), the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R, and “red” is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4. When "BAR-Red BAR-Blue Lip" is displayed, a prize is won.

  The winning combination “C_Bell 1” is a so-called eight-bell combination and is established by displaying “Green Lip-Yellow Lip-Blue Lip” in the middle of the reel display window 4 (see bit 0 of data “10”). ) And 8 medals are paid out.

  The winning combination “C_Bell 2” is a so-called eight-bell combination and is established by displaying “blue lip-blue lip-blue lip” in the middle of the reel display window 4 (see bit 7 of data “11”). ) And 8 medals are paid out. Here, the eight-bell combination of the winning combination “C_Bell 1 and 2” constitutes a combination having a predetermined symbol combination in the present embodiment.

  Each winning combination "C_Normal Cherry 1 (Red BAR-Blue Lip-Yellow Lip)", "C_Normal Cherry 2 (Red BAR-Blue Lip-Zhu Lip)", "C_Normal Cherry 3 (Blue BAR-Blue Lip-Yellow)" Lip "," C_Normal Cherry 4 (Blue BAR-Blue Lip-Red Lip) "," C_Normal Cherry 5 (White BAR-Blue Lip-Yellow Lip) "," C_Normal Cherry 6 (White BAR-Blue Lip-) "C_Normal Cherry 7 (Green Lip-Blue Lip-Yellow Lip)", "C_Normal Cherry 8 (Green Lip-Blue Lip-Zhu Lip)", "C_Normal Cherry 9 (Red Lip-Blue Lip) -C_normal cherry 10 (red lip-blue lip-red lip) "," C_normal cherry 11 (red lip-blue lip-yellow lip) "," C_normal cherry 12 (red lip-blue) Lip-Zhu Lip) "," C_Normal Cherry 13 (Purple Lip-Blue Lip- Descriptor) ", and" C_ usually cherry 14 (purple descriptor - Blue descriptor - Zhu descriptor) "are both two medals are paid out.

  Each winning role “C_Chance Cherry 1 (Red BAR-Yellow Lip-Yellow Lip)”, “C_Chance Cherry 2 (Red BAR-Yellow Lip-Zhu Lip)”, “C_Chance Cherry 3 (Blue BAR-Yellow Lip-Yellow) "C_ Chance Cherry 4 (Blue BAR-Yellow Lip-Zhu Lip)", "C_ Chance Cherry 5 (White BAR-Yellow Lip-Yellow Lip)", "C_ Chance Cherry 6 (White BAR-Yellow Lip-) “Chu Chance Lip”, “C_Chance Cherry 7 (Green Lip-Yellow Lip-Yellow Lip)”, and “C_Chance Cherry 8 (Green Lip-Yellow Lip-Yellow Lip)” all receive two medals. The

  Each winning combination “C_chance role A1 (blue lip-yellow lip-red BAR)”, “C_chance role A2 (blue lip-yellow lip-red lip)”, “C_chance role B1 (blue lip-yellow lip-blue) BAR) "," C_chance role B2 (blue lip-yellow lip-green lip) "," C_chance role C1 (blue lip-yellow lip-white BAR) ", and" C_chance role C2 (blue lip-yellow lip) " -"Purple lip" "is a so-called chance role, and one medal is paid out.

<Internal lottery table for general gaming state>
In the internal lottery table for the general gaming state shown in FIG. 22, the lottery value and the data pointer for each set value are associated with the winning number when the main gaming state is the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state). .

  In the present embodiment, the random number for lottery extracted from the predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each winning number, and whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred.

  Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data (that is, the dake pointer) to which it is assigned will be determined. That is, the winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (65536)”.

  Here, when the number of times of determination processing for determining whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative exceeds the number of winning numbers, the result of the internal lottery processing is set to “lost”.

  The data pointer is data acquired as a result of the lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, and the internal winning combination defined by the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 12). This is data for specifying.

  That is, the data pointer is data used to determine the storage area type and 1-byte data in the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination / replay shown in FIG. 12 and the internal winning combination determination table for bonus shown in FIG. is there. For the data pointer, a small role / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are individually defined corresponding to each of the plurality of winning numbers.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in the general game state internal lottery table, the setting value “6” is more set than the setting value “1” for some lottery values among the winning numbers “1” to “51”. It is set high. For example, for the winning numbers “5”, “6”, “7”, “45”, the lottery values of the setting value “1” are “327”, “327”, “327”, “820”, The lottery values of the set value “6” are “450”, “450”, “450”, and “900”.

  A lottery value common to the setting values “1” to “6” is associated with other winning numbers except the winning numbers “5”, “6”, “7”, and “45”.

  In the data pointer for a small role / replay, values corresponding to the winning numbers are associated with the winning numbers “1” to “50”, and “0” is associated with the winning number “51”. It has been.

  On the other hand, regarding the bonus data pointer, “0” is associated with the winning numbers “1” to “50”, and “1” is associated with the winning number “51”. .

  In the general gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “51” for the set values “1” to “6” may be shared.

<RT1 gaming state internal lottery table>
In the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state shown in FIG. 23, lottery values and data pointers for each set value are associated with the winning number when the main gaming state is the RT1 gaming state.

  Since the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table is configured in substantially the same manner as the general gaming state internal lottery table shown in FIG. 22, the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table is different from the general gaming state internal lottery table. The description of the same parts as those in the general gaming state internal lottery table is omitted including illustration.

  When the number of times of the determination process for determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative exceeds the number of winning numbers, the result of the internal lottery process is set as “losing”, but in this embodiment, the main gaming state is In the RT1 gaming state, the number of times of determination processing as to whether or not the result of subtraction is negative is set so as not to exceed the number of winning numbers.

  Since the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table is a bonus flag carry-over state in the MB gaming state that is not activated even if the main gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, the set value “0” to In “6”, the lottery value of the winning number “51” corresponding to “F_MB” is set to “0”.

  Also, in the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “4” are higher than the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “4” in the general gaming state internal lottery table. Is set. In the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “1” to “51” for the set values “1” to “6” may be shared.

<Priority order table>
The priority order table shown in FIG. 24 defines the priority order of the number of sliding symbols when the main gaming state is other than the MB gaming state (non-MB gaming state). The priority order table indicates an order (hereinafter referred to as priority order) in which applicable numerical values are preferentially applied within a range of numerical values (ie, 0 to 6) of the sliding piece number determination data predetermined as the number of sliding pieces. Stipulate.

<MB game state priority order table>
The priority order table for MB gaming state shown in FIG. 25 defines the priority order of the number of sliding pieces when the main gaming state is in the MB gaming state. The MB gaming state priority order table defines the priority order of numerical values that can be applied from the numerical value range (ie, 0 or 1) of the sliding piece number determination data predetermined as the number of sliding pieces.

  In the priority order table and the MB gaming state priority order table, each numerical value is searched in order from the higher priority (1) to the lower priority (5), and as a result of the search, the numerical value corresponding to the priority order “1” is used. Applied preferentially. The priority order table is provided assuming that there are a plurality of sliding pieces having the same priority order, and the number of sliding pieces having a higher priority order is applied.

  The priority order table and the MB gaming state priority order table in the present embodiment define the priority order based on the number of sliding piece determination data. That is, the priority order is defined so that the numerical value corresponding to the sliding piece number determination data is the highest. As a result, the data for determining the number of sliding symbols is determined preferentially over the number of other sliding symbols, so that the display of symbols intended during the development of the stop table is prioritized.

<Reel stop initial setting table>
In the reel stop initial setting table shown in FIG. 26, the drawing-in priority table selection data or the drawing-in priority table number and the stop table selection data group are associated with the spinning stop number. These various data indicate various table numbers to be selected in the stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R according to the progress of one unit game.

  The pull-in priority table selection data is a number for selecting a pull-in priority table selection table shown in FIG. 27 described later. The pull-in priority table number is a number for selecting a pull-in priority table shown in FIG.

  Details of the “stop table selection data group” are omitted, but a stop table or the like that stores the pressed positions of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R related to the first to third stop operations and the number of sliding pieces in association with each other is stored. It is a number for selection. These numbers are data used to determine “slip piece number determination data”, that is, to determine the positions at which the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped according to the progress of one unit game. .

  In the reel stop initial setting table, the drawing priority order table selection data is associated with the rotation stop number corresponding to the data pointer for which the stop control differs depending on the stop operation order (pushing order), and the stop operation is performed. The turn-in priority table number is associated with the rotation stop number corresponding to the data pointer for which stop control is performed regardless of the order.

<Pull-in priority table selection table>
In the pull-in priority table selection table shown in FIG. 27, a pull-in priority table number for the stop operation type indicating the stop operation order is associated with each pull-in priority table selection data.

  For example, in the pull-in priority table selection data “00”, when the first stop operation is “left”, the pull-in priority table number “00” is associated with the second and third stop operations. When the first stop operation is “medium”, the pull-in priority table number “01” is also associated with the second and third stop operations.

  In the pull-in priority table selection data “00”, when the first stop operation is “right”, the pull-in priority table number “01” is associated. At the time of the second stop operation, when the first stop operation is “right”, the second stop operation is “left” (“right → left” in the figure), and the second stop operation is “middle”. In some cases (“right → middle” in the figure), the pull-in priority table number “01” is associated. During the third stop operation, when the first stop operation is “right” and the second stop operation is “left”, the third stop operation is “middle” (“right → left → middle” in the figure). ), And when the first stop operation is “right” and the second stop operation is “middle”, and the third stop operation is “left” (“right → middle → left” in the figure). Is associated with the pull-in priority table number “02”.

<Pull-in priority table>
The pull-in priority table shown in FIG. 28 indicates which symbol is to be preferentially drawn when there are a plurality of symbols (corresponding to the combination determined as an internal winning combination) that may be displayed within the pull-in range. Represents. In FIG. 28, the data of the winning action flag (winning combination) is omitted for the sake of simplicity.

  In the draw-in priority table, draw-in priority data indicating the draw-in priority of the symbol combination related to the winning action flag is represented. The pull-in priority data is information provided for the main CPU 93 to identify the pull-in priority.

  Here, “retraction” means that the winning combination constituted by the combination of symbols related to the internal winning combination within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces is displayed along the winning line in the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. This means stopping rotation.

  For example, in the drawing priority table number “00”, it is determined that there is a possibility that the winning action flag “C_left special × CC1-4” and the winning action flag “C_medium special A × A1-4” may win. In this case, since “C_left special × CC1-4” has a higher priority than “C_middle special A × A1-4”, “C_left special × CC1-4” is preferentially drawn. Stop control of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed.

[Various storage areas on the main control side]
29 to 36 are diagrams showing examples of various storage areas stored in the main RAM 95 (see FIG. 8).

<Internal winning combination storage area>
The internal winning combination storing area shown in FIG. 29 is composed of seven storage areas of internal winning combination storing areas (storage area types) 0-6. The size of each of the internal winning combination storage areas 0 to 6 is 1 byte.

  Therefore, the overall size of the internal winning combination storing areas 0 to 6 is 7 bytes. The internal winning combination storage areas 0 to 6 store data determined based on the internal winning combination data (storage area type) defined by the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG.

  In the internal winning combination storing area shown in the figure, for example, bits 0 to 7 of the internal winning combination storing area 0 correspond to “losing”, “F_normal lip 1 to 4”, and “F_ scroll lip 1 to 3”, respectively. Yes.

  Similarly, bits 0 to 2 of the internal winning combination storing area 6 correspond to “F_chance combinations 1 to 3”, respectively, and bits 3 to 7 are unused.

<Display combination storage area>
The display combination storage area shown in FIG. 30 includes 26 storage areas of display combination storage areas (storage area types) 0 to 25. The size of each of the display combination storage areas 0 to 25 is 1 byte.

  Accordingly, the total size of the display combination storage areas 0 to 25 is 26 bytes. The display combination storage areas 0 to 25 store data determined based on the winning combination data (storage area type) defined by the symbol combination tables (bonus, replay, small combination) shown in FIGS. The data in the display combination storing area is used by the main CPU 93 to identify the winning combination after all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped.

  In the illustrated display combination storing area, for example, bits 0 to 7 of the display combination storing area 0 are “C_white ten XX”, “C_white ten XX × 2”, and “C_white ten XX × 1”, respectively. ”,“ C_cross white BC2 ”,“ C_cross white BC1 ”,“ C_center white BC ”,“ C_MB2 ”, and“ C_MB1 ”.

  Similarly, bits 5 to 7 of the display combination storage area 25 correspond to “C_right special CC × 4”, “C_right special CC × 3”, and “C_right special CC × 2”, respectively. Bit 4 is unused.

<Design code storage area>
The symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 31 is configured in the same manner as the display combination storage area shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  In the symbol code storage area, data indicating a winning combination in a rotating reel is stored. For example, when all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating, all the winning combinations can be won, so “1” is stored in all the corresponding bits in the symbol code storage area. Thereafter, when the left reel 3L is stopped (the reels 3C and 3R are rotated), the bit corresponding to the winning combination that cannot be won due to the stop of the left reel 3L is updated to “0”.

  Referring to FIGS. 18 to 21, for example, when the symbol “red BAR” is stopped in the middle reel 3 </ b> C, the symbol “C_normal” in which the symbol of the middle reel 3 </ b> C is “green lip”, “blue lip”, or the like. Bits corresponding to “Lip 1 to 12”, “C_normal cherry 1 to 14”, etc. are updated to “0”. On the other hand, the bits corresponding to “C_center red BC”, “C_cross red BC1-4”, etc., whose symbol of the middle reel 3C is “red BAR” are maintained at “1”.

<Operation stop button storage area>
The operation stop button storage area shown in FIG. 32 is 1 byte in size. Bits 4 to 6 are storage areas indicating stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R that can detect a stop operation by the player, that is, effective stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R.

  Bits 0 to 2 are storage areas indicating the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R in which the stop operation corresponding to the valid stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R is detected immediately before. In this embodiment, bit 3 and bit 7 are unused and “0” is stored.

  Bit 0 corresponds to the left stop button 19L. When the left stop button 19L is operated by the player, “1” is stored in bit 0. Bit 1 corresponds to the middle stop button 19C. When the middle stop button 19C is operated by the player, "1" is stored in bit 1. Bit 2 corresponds to the right stop button 19R. When the right stop button 19R is operated by the player, “1” is stored in bit 2.

  Bit 4 corresponds to the left stop button 19L. When the left stop button 19L is valid, “1” is stored in bit 4. Bit 5 corresponds to the middle stop button 19C. When the middle stop button 19C is valid, “1” is stored in bit 5. Bit 6 corresponds to the right stop button 19R. When the right stop button 19R is valid, "1" is stored in bit 6.

  In this embodiment, “the stop button is valid” means that a stop operation can be detected. The stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R corresponding to the reels rotating at a constant speed and capable of detecting the stop operation are referred to as effective stop buttons.

<Pressing order storage area>
The pressing order storage area shown in FIG. 33 is an area for storing information indicating the pressing order of the three stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R. This push-down order storage area is 1 byte in size, and bits 0 to 5 are used. Bits 6 and 7 are unused and “0” is stored.

  Bit 0 corresponds to the pressing order “left → middle → right”, and “1” is stored (turned on) in bit 0 when the pressing order is “left → middle → right”. Similarly, when the pressing order is “left → right → middle”, “1” is stored (turned on) in bit 1, and when the pressing order is “middle → left → right”, “1” is stored in bit 2. Is stored (ON), “1” is stored in bit 3 if “middle → right → left”, and “1” is stored in bit 4 if “right → left → middle”. In the case of “right → middle → left”, “1” is stored (turned on) in bit 5.

<Carry-over portion storage area>
The carryover combination storage area shown in FIG. 34 is 1 byte in size. Bit 0 corresponds to “MB (F_MB)”, and bits 1 to 7 are unused. As a result of the internal lottery process, when the internal winning combination “F_MB” is determined, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the carryover combination storing area.

  By storing “1” in bit 0 of the carryover combination storage area, it can be determined that the player is in the state of winning “F_MB”. The state in which “1” is stored in bit 0 of the carryover combination storage area is held until the symbol combination corresponding to “C_MB1, 2” is displayed on the winning line.

  That is, when “F_MB” is won, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the carryover combination storage area in at least one unit game until the combination of symbols of these bonuses is displayed on the winning line as a display combination. The maintained state is maintained. Maintaining a state in which “1” is stored in bit 0 from the unit game winning the bonus to the unit game winning is called “carryover”. Further, “F_MB” stored in the carryover combination storage area is also referred to as “carryover combination”.

  When a stop operation is performed by the player and each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R stops, the internal winning combination storing area is initialized, but the carryover combination storing area is not initialized. In this way, the “carry over” state can be maintained.

<Game state flag storage area>
The game state flag storage area shown in FIG. 35 stores a flag for indicating whether the main game state is the bonus game state or the RT1 game state, and has a size of 1 byte.

  Bit 0 and bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area relate to the bonus gaming state, and bit 2 relates to the RT1 gaming state. In the present embodiment, bits 3 to 7 of the game state flag storage area are unused.

  When the main gaming state is the bonus gaming state, bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to “1” (on) in the MB gaming state, and in the gaming state flag storage area in the CB gaming state (winning state of F_CB role). When bit 1 is set to “1” (on) and the main gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, bit 2 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to “1” (on).

<Retrieve priority data storage area>
The pull-in priority data storage area shown in FIG. 36 includes a left reel pull-in priority data storage area, a middle reel pull-in priority data storage area, and a right reel pull-in priority data storage area.

  The contents (search symbol position and drawing priority data) of the drawing priority data storage area for the middle reel and the drawing priority data storage area for the right reel are the same as the drawing priority data storage area for the left reel. In the following, the left reel pull-in priority data storage area will be described.

  The left reel pull-in priority data storage area can store pull-in priority data (see FIG. 28) for each search symbol position (see symbol position data in FIG. 10). For example, for the symbol position data 0, a role (any one of 00EH to 000H) defined in the priorities 1 to 3 in FIG. 28 is defined. From these pull-in priority data, the internal winning combination and Depending on the stop positions of the other reels 3C and 3R, any pull-in priority data is stored. Thereby, the left reel 3L is controlled so as to stop or not stop the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination on the winning line.

  Similarly, for the symbol position data 1 to 20, the roles defined in the priority order are also defined. From these drawing priority data, the internal winning combination and the stop positions of the other reels 3L, 3C, 3R are determined. In response, any pull-in priority data is stored.

<Outline of gaming state controlled by sub-control>
FIGS. 37A to 37H are diagrams for explaining each piece of control information controlled by the sub control circuit 101. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) to (h), the sub-control circuit 101 includes a sub-game state, a normal mode, a probability state, a pseudo bonus selection effect, an AT in-probability state, a special mode, and an AT. Control information of the continuation type and the AT status flag is controlled.

  The sub game state shown in FIG. 37 (a) has a normal state, a precursor state, a pseudo bonus transition state, a plurality of pseudo bonus states, and a plurality of AT states, each in the sub game state storage area. When the stored bit and the bit corresponding to each sub game state is “1” (ON), the sub control circuit 101 executes an effect corresponding to each sub game state.

  In addition, the sub game state is set to the old sub game state in the sub game state storage area in the previous game, and the sub game state set in the sub game state storage area in the current game is updated. Each can be set in the secondary game state storage area as the secondary game state.

  The normal state is a game state that is executed regardless of whether the main game state is the RT0 game state or the RT1 game state, and is a game state that is selected during a normal game.

  The precursor state is a gaming state that is selected when winning a pseudo bonus type lottery executed in a pseudo bonus winning opportunity, which will be described later, and an effect different from the normal state is executed during a unit game of a predetermined number of games. At the same time, a pseudo bonus promotion lottery that promotes the winning pseudo bonus state to a pseudo bonus state more advantageous to the player is executed.

  The pseudo bonus transition state is a gaming state that is executed when a pseudo bonus type lottery executed at a pseudo bonus winning opportunity described later is won, and a pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect described later is executed, and a pseudo bonus transition is performed as a winning combination. Until winning a pseudo-bonus transitioning role (described later) including symbols (described later), a transition lottery in a pseudo-bonus state advantageous to the player and a promotion lottery (described later) in a pseudo-bonus state being won are executed to transfer a pseudo bonus This is a gaming state in which a pseudo bonus confirmation screen navigation effect (described later) that allows a pseudo bonus transition symbol to be won when winning a combination is executed.

  The pseudo bonus state is a pseudo bonus type lottery executed in a pseudo bonus winning opportunity, which will be described later. This is a gaming state that shifts when a screen navigation effect (described later) is executed, and is composed of first to sixth pseudo bonus states that differ in the effect content.

  Here, the pseudo bonus state refers to the pseudo bonus state in the lottery process executed for each unit game by the sub-control circuit 101 during the RT1 gaming state which is the high RT state, and “F_normal rep. 4 ”, and when one of the predetermined specific conditions is established that the stop button 19L, 19C, 19R is stopped by a specific pressing order by the player, the sub control circuit 101 executes In the gaming state, a pseudo bonus transition symbol (described later) is displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4, and the sub-control circuit 101 performs an effect that simulates a so-called bonus gaming state. In the pseudo bonus state, push order navigation (described later) for winning the eight-bell combination is notified eight times as a predetermined number of times.

  The first to fifth pseudo bonus states are game states in which push order navigation (described later) for notifying a push order for winning the eight-bell combination is executed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, eight times). is there. In the sixth pseudo bonus state, push order navigation (to be described later) for winning the eight-bell combination is executed differently from the first to fifth pseudo bonus states (20 times in the present embodiment). The The production contents in each pseudo bonus state will be described later.

  The sub control circuit 101 stores the pseudo bonus types 0 to 8 in the pseudo bonus type stock table. Here, in the pseudo bonus type stock table, the pseudo bonus type won by the pseudo bonus type lottery is stored at the end of the pseudo bonus type stock table and at the top of the pseudo bonus type stock table Is a table set as a pseudo bonus type of a pseudo bonus state to be executed.

  Here, in the following description, the case where the pseudo bonus type lottery is won is the case where any one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is won in the pseudo bonus type lottery.

  The push order navigation means that when a specific winning combination is won by pressing the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R in a predetermined pressing order, the predetermined pressing order is notified. For example, when the predetermined pressing order is the order of the stop button 19C, the stop button 19R, and the stop button 19L, the “middle-right-left” pressing order navigation is selected, and the player presses the predetermined pressing order. The order is announced. Further, of the push order navigations, the push order navigation for winning the eight-bell combination constitutes information on an advantageous stop operation related to the provision of game media in the present embodiment.

  Further, the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect means that when the pseudo bonus state is won and the pseudo bonus transition process shown in FIG. 140 is executed, the fact that the pseudo bonus is won is notified and the pseudo bonus confirmation screen is displayed. It is an effect that executes a navigation effect.

  The pseudo bonus confirmation screen navigation effect is an effect that is executed when the internal bonus is played in the normal bonus replay and the push order bell that are the pseudo bonus transition role in the pseudo bonus transition state. When a normal replay is won internally, a push order navigation that allows a pseudo bonus state to be displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 is displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 in addition to a pseudo bonus state and suggesting the contents of the pseudo bonus state to be transferred to the player. As the game is executed, the player is notified that the pseudo bonus state is started from the next game. When the push order bell is won internally, push order navigation for winning the 8-bell role is executed according to the effect gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 91.

  The AT state is determined based on the AT winning number having the contents related to the winning of the AT state among the AT winning numbers having different contents in the ART lottery executed in a predetermined winning opportunity including the case where the pseudo bonus type lottery is won. This is a secondary gaming state that is selected when a predetermined number of push order navigations are executed in each pseudo bonus state, and is a secondary gaming state in which a push order navigation that wins an 8-bell combination is executed.

  When the secondary gaming state becomes the AT state, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is the RT1 gaming state in which the main gaming state has a high winning probability of the replay role, and the secondary gaming state is the AT state. It becomes ART game state. Here, the AT winning number will be described later.

  The AT state includes a first AT state as the first specific effect state, a second AT state as the second specific effect state, and a pseudo bonus promotion game state as the third specific effect state. Each game state is a game state in which push order navigation with 8 bells is performed, and the number of games is determined at the start of each AT state. Further, the sub-control circuit 101 is configured to shift to the first AT state when shifting from the pseudo bonus state to the AT state, and shift to the second AT state after the first AT state ends. The first AT state and the second AT state of one time become one set of AT states.

  Here, in the first AT state, when the pseudo bonus state is won during the first AT state, lottery is executed to increase the number of games in the first AT state when the corresponding pseudo bonus state is executed. This is a secondary game state. Further, the second AT state notifies that the AT state continuously shifts from the second AT state to the first AT state when the pseudo bonus state is won during the second AT state, and This is a secondary gaming state in which, when the second AT state ends, a continuous effect is determined as to whether or not to continue the transition from the second AT state to the first AT state. Here, in the second AT state, a group of characters is displayed in the longitudinal left area and the longitudinal right area of the liquid crystal display device 11, respectively. ) And the character group (enemy) displayed in the region on the right side in the longitudinal direction are each reduced from the initial display. In addition, in the case of continuous transition to the first AT state, at least one character of the character group (ally) is displayed in the left region in the longitudinal direction until the end of the second AT state. When the transition to the first AT state is not continued, at least one character of the character group (enemy) continues to be displayed in the region on the right side in the longitudinal direction until the end of the second AT state. In addition, the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state is different from the first AT state and the second AT state, and in the pseudo bonus type lottery (described later) executed in the first AT state and the second AT state, This is a gaming state that shifts to the case of winning 5 or 6, and is a gaming state in which a lottery is executed as to whether or not the pseudo bonus state being hit is promoted to a pseudo bonus additional state that is more advantageous to the player. is there.

  The normal mode shown in FIG. 37 (b) is composed of normal modes 1 to 5, and each is stored in the normal mode storage area. The sub-control circuit 101 is configured to change the probability table referred to in each lottery process according to the normal mode to be selected.

  Here, in the normal lottery bonus winning ART lottery and the probability state lottery, when the normal mode 2 is selected as the normal mode, the table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101 is when the normal mode 1 is selected. Compared with the table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101, the winning probability of the AT winning number advantageous to the player is set higher. Further, the table referred to by the sub control circuit 101 when the normal mode 3 is selected as the normal mode is different from the table referred to by the sub control circuit 101 when the normal mode 2 is selected. The winning probability of the AT winning number that is advantageous to the player is set high.

  When the normal mode 4 or 5 is selected, the sub-control circuit 101 is configured to always win the AT state in the normal medium bonus bonus lottery when winning the pseudo bonus type lottery. . In the normal medium bonus bonus ART lottery and the probability state lottery, the table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101 when the normal mode 5 is selected as the normal mode is the table when the normal mode 4 is selected. Compared with the table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101, the winning probability of the AT state that is advantageous to the player is set high.

  The probability state shown in FIG. 37C is composed of low accuracy, high accuracy, and ultra high accuracy. The sub-control circuit 101 is configured to change a probability table referred to in each lottery process according to the probability state to be selected.

  Here, in the normal medium pseudo bonus winning ART lottery and the probability state lottery, the table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101 when the high probability is selected as the probability state is the sub table when the low probability is selected. Compared with the table referred to by the control circuit 101, the winning probability of the pseudo bonus state, the AT state, the probability state, and the number of precursor games, which is advantageous to the player, is set high. In addition, the table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101 when the ultra-high probability is selected as the probability state is compared with the table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101 when the high-precision is selected. The winning probability of the pseudo bonus state, the AT state, the probability state, and the number of precursor games, which is advantageous to the player, is set high.

  The pseudo bonus selection effect as the effect mode shown in FIG. 37 (d) is composed of first to third pseudo bonus selection effects, and each is stored in the pseudo bonus selection effect storage area. The sub-control circuit 101 is configured to execute the first to third pseudo bonus selection effects selected by the player when executing the first to fourth pseudo bonus states.

  Among the pseudo bonus selection effects, the first pseudo bonus selection effect as the first effect mode and the second pseudo bonus selection effect as the second effect mode have different effects and are in the AT state. When winning, the main control circuit 91 and the sub-control circuit 101 are controlled by the notification timing for executing the first AT state notification effect and the second AT state notification effect in which it is notified that the AT state has been won. This is an effect that suggests each game information to the player.

  Here, the notification timing is a timing at which it is announced that the AT state has been won, and when the AT state has been won, eight sheets at the time when the fact that the AT state has been won in the pseudo bonus state has been announced. The eight notification timings 1 to 8 are set in the sub-control circuit 101 according to the remaining number of winnings for the bell combination, and the set notification timing is stored in the notification timing counter. For example, when the notification timing 8 is set, 7 is stored in the notification timing counter because the remaining number of wins for the eight-bell role is seven.

  The first pseudo bonus selection effect is an effect suggesting which of the setting “1” to the setting “6” is the setting value selected by the main control circuit 91 according to the notification timing. The second pseudo bonus selection effect is an effect that suggests a loop rate (described later) of the AT state that is won by the notification timing.

  The third pseudo bonus selection effect as the third effect mode is a player who selects the normal mode that the sub control circuit 101 selects from the next game when the AT state is not won at the end of the pseudo bonus state. This suggests which of the normal medium pseudo bonus winning ART lottery tables (see (a) to (c) of FIGS. 52 to 54) is referred to in the next normal medium pseudo bonus winning ART lottery. It is a production that suggests.

  In this way, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes an effect suggesting different game information for each of the first to third pseudo bonus selection effects selected at the start of the pseudo bonus state. The range of strategies for games can be expanded. Here, the game information is each piece of control information related to a game controlled by the main control circuit 91 and the sub control circuit 101.

  The in-AT probability state shown in FIG. 37 (e) is composed of the same color normal and the same color high accuracy, and is stored in the AT in-probability state storage area. The sub-control circuit 101 is configured to change a probability table to be referred to in each lottery process according to the in-AT probability state to be selected.

  Here, the pseudo bonus lottery during the first AT state (see FIGS. 72A and 72B) and the pseudo bonus lottery during the second AT state (see FIGS. 73A to 82B). ), The table referred to by the sub-control circuit 101 when the same color accuracy is selected as the AT probability state is compared with the table referenced by the sub-control circuit 101 when the same color normal is selected. Thus, in the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect described later, the winning probability of the pseudo bonus state in which the same color symbol can be displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 is set high.

  In the AT state, when a normal replay is won as an internal winning combination, a replay symbol for notifying that a normal replay has been won is displayed in three symbol display areas (not shown) provided on the liquid crystal display device 11. Although displayed in a single row, when the same color accuracy is selected, replay symbols of the same color are more easily displayed in a single row than when the same color normal is selected. In addition, when the same color normal is selected, at least one of the replay symbols displayed in a row is likely to be different in color compared to the case where the same color accuracy is selected. Here, the sub-control circuit 101 is not limited to the AT state, for example, even when the sub-game state is the normal state, the replay for notifying the symbol display area of the liquid crystal display device 11 that the normal replay has been won. Display the symbols in a row. At this time, when the same color high accuracy is selected, the replay symbols of the same color are more easily displayed in a line than when the same color normal is selected. In addition, when the same color normal is selected, at least one of the replay symbols displayed in a row is likely to be different in color compared to the case where the same color accuracy is selected.

  For this reason, when the same color high accuracy is selected, the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 can easily display the replay symbols of the same color in a line in the symbol display area of the liquid crystal display device 11 in the AT state. It is configured so that the winning probability of the pseudo bonus state in which the symbol of the same color can be displayed is high, and the winning probability of the pseudo bonus state in which the symbol of the same color can be displayed is suggested by winning the replay symbol of the same color. .

  In addition, when the same color normal is selected, the sub CPU 102 tends to have a different color replay symbol in at least one of the replay symbols displayed in a line in the symbol display area of the liquid crystal display device 11 in the AT state. In the case where the winning probability of the pseudo bonus state that can be displayed is increased, and at least one of the replay symbols displayed in a line in the symbol display area of the liquid crystal display device 11 is a different color replay symbol. In addition, it is suggested that the winning probability of the pseudo bonus state in which a different color pattern can be displayed is high. Thus, the sub CPU 102 constitutes a pseudo special game state suggestion unit.

  The special mode shown in FIG. 37 (f) includes special modes 1 to 6, and is stored in the special mode storage area. The sub-control circuit 101 is configured to change the probability table referred to in each lottery process according to the special mode to be selected.

  The sub-control circuit 101 selects special modes 1 to 5 based on a special mode table determined by referring to a special mode table reference table (see FIG. 61) based on a special table and special table information described later. In addition, the sub-control circuit 101 switches to the other special modes 1 to 5 when it wins the AT winning number associated with the execution of the special mode 6 in the lottery process of the AT state executed at a predetermined winning opportunity. The special mode 6 is selected with priority. The sub-control circuit 101 selects the special mode 1 as the special mode in the initial state.

  Here, the special modes 2 to 4 may be selected redundantly. For example, when the special mode 2 and the special mode 3 are selected redundantly, in the pseudo bonus type lottery during the second AT state. Reference is made to the pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and (b).

  Further, in the special mode, in the second AT state pseudo bonus type lottery (see step S666 of FIG. 149), which will be described later, the sub CPU 102 has a plurality of different winning probabilities that are determined to shift to the pseudo bonus state. This is referred to when determining which of the two pseudo bonus lottery tables during AT state (see FIGS. 73 to 82 (a) and (b)) is selected.

  The AT continuation type shown in FIG. 37 (g) is composed of no continuation, continuation, and special continuation, and is stored in the AT continuation type storage area. The AT continuation type is determined as an AT continuation lottery executed in the first AT state start process (see FIGS. 145 and 146). Here, in the AT continuation lottery, when it is determined that the continuation of the AT continuation type is “no continuation”, the sub-control circuit 101 ends the AT state without shifting to the first AT state after the end of the second AT state. On the other hand, in the AT continuation lottery, when the continuation or special continuation is determined as the AT continuation type, the sub-control circuit 101 continues the AT state by shifting to the first AT state after the end of the second AT state.

  In addition, in the AT continuation lottery, when the special continuation is determined as the AT continuation type, the sub-control circuit 101 continues as the AT continuation type in the second AT state processing (see FIGS. 149 to 151). As an effect different from that determined, an effect of displaying characters of a predetermined number of persons (10 persons in the present embodiment) in the region on the left side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 11 is executed and a special condition is established. It is configured to perform special effects in cases. Here, the special condition is a condition that is satisfied when a value set in a special continuation game number counter (described later) is not 0 when the second AT state ends. The special effect means that when a special condition is satisfied, the ten characters (friends) displayed in the region on the left side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 11 are not reduced by one, and the liquid crystal display device 11 This is an effect that suggests to the player that the AT state stock is generated by performing an effect in which all the characters (enemies) displayed in the area on the right in the longitudinal direction disappear, and is stored in the AT continuation type storage area. This is one of a plurality of continuous notification modes for reporting the set AT continuation type.

  The AT state flag shown in FIG. 37 (h) includes a loop lottery state, a first AT state game number lottery state, a special mode lottery state, and a first AT state effect state. Each state constituting the AT state flag is composed of three flags: a normal time flag, a pseudo bonus continuation flag during the first AT state, and a pseudo bonus continuation flag during the second AT state. Has been.

  Here, the normal time flag is a flag that is selected when the initial state and other flags are not selected. Further, the pseudo bonus continuation flag during the first AT state is a flag that is selected when the pseudo bonus state is won in the first AT state. Further, the pseudo bonus continuation flag during the second AT state is a flag that is selected when the pseudo bonus state is won in the second AT state.

  Each storage area and each counter described above are provided in a predetermined area of the sub-control circuit 101, respectively.

[Various control side data tables]
38 to 107 are various data tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. In each table shown in FIGS. 38 to 107, each item corresponding to the internal winning combination also corresponds to the displayed combination.

<Normal mode reference table lottery table when setting is changed>
The setting change normal mode reference table lottery table shown in FIG. 38 is a table that is referred to when determining the table in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 133. In FIG. 38, only the cases of setting 1 and setting 6 are described, but this is an example, and in the case of setting 2 to 5, a predetermined probability is set for each table.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in the normal mode reference table lottery table at the time of setting change, lottery values different in setting values “1” to “6” are associated with the winning probabilities of the respective tables.

<Normal mode reference table>
The normal mode reference table shown in FIG. 39 is a table that is referred to when determining the normal mode in the normal processing shown in FIGS. 135 and 136 and the common processing at the end of ART shown in FIG. 154. In the normal mode reference table, normal mode numbers 1 to 5 associated with the normal modes 1 to 5 are stored.

  In the normal mode reference table shown in FIG. 39, “pseudo bonus 0 to 10 times” represents the number of AT state non-winnings that did not win the AT state at the time of winning the pseudo bonus type lottery. Initialized by winning the AT state.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the normal mode number is determined from the AT state non-winning count of the pseudo bonus type lottery and the selected table. For example, the state where the pseudo bonus type lottery has not been won since the power is turned on or after the ART state ends, that is, the number of times that the AT state was not won when the pseudo bonus type lottery was won is 0, and the table A is selected as the table If it is, the normal mode is determined as the normal mode 1 because the normal mode number 1 is stored in the normal mode reference table.

  In addition, when the tables A to Y are selected, the normal mode reference table has a specific number of AT state non-winning times defined for each table (for example, 9 times for the table A and 9 times for the table W). 4), the normal mode number 4 is stored so that the normal mode 4 is determined.

  In addition, when the table Z is selected, the normal mode reference table shifts to the normal mode 5 in which the player shifts to the AT state that is more advantageous to the player than when the normal mode 4 is determined when the next pseudo bonus type lottery is won. As determined, the normal mode number 5 is stored.

<Normal mode reference table lottery table at AT end>
The AT end normal mode reference table lottery table shown in FIGS. 40 and 41 (a) and (b) is a table referred to when determining a table in the common process at the end of ART shown in FIG. is there.

  As shown in (a) and (b) of FIG. 40 and FIG. 41, in the AT end normal mode reference table lottery table, each table A to Z includes a lottery value that is different from the last selected table A to Z. Are associated.

<Highly accurate transition game number lottery table>
42 to 44, the high-probability transition game number lottery tables shown in (a) to (d) in the normal middle process shown in FIGS. 135 and 136 and the pseudo-bonus end process shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, It is a table referred when determining a probability state.

  As shown in each of (a) to (d) of FIG. 42 to FIG. 44, the high-probability transition game number lottery table differs depending on the normal mode and the probability state selected by the sub-control circuit 101. A lottery table is configured to be selected. For example, when the normal mode is the normal mode 1 and the probability state is low probability, the high-probability transition game number lottery table shown in FIG.

  As shown in each of (a) to (d) of FIG. 42 to FIG. 44, in each highly probable game number lottery table, each probability state and the number of games in which the probability state continues differ for each internal winning combination. A lottery value is associated, and the probability status is low to high when winning a common bell, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “chance replay” and “chance eye” as an internal winning combination. It is a lottery value that is easy to transition from high accuracy to ultra high accuracy and that is easy to maintain ultra high accuracy.

<Pseudo bonus reference table>
The pseudo bonus reference table shown in FIG. 45 is a table in which the effect contents of each pseudo bonus to be executed in the pseudo bonus transition process shown in FIG. 140 and the pseudo bonus medium process shown in FIGS. 141 and 142 are set.

  In the pseudo bonus reference table shown in FIG. 45, the pseudo bonus information of the pseudo bonus type, pseudo bonus color type, pseudo bonus promotion gaming state flag, and pseudo bonus navigation counter correspond to the first to sixth pseudo bonus states, respectively. It is attached.

  The pseudo bonus type is a value used by the sub control circuit 101 to identify the winning pseudo bonus state in each control process by the sub control circuit 101 to be described later, and the pseudo bonus type 1 is the first pseudo bonus state. , Pseudo bonus type 2 is associated with the second pseudo bonus state, pseudo bonus type 3 is associated with the third pseudo bonus state, and pseudo bonus type 4 is associated with the fourth pseudo bonus state. The pseudo bonus type 7 is associated with the fifth pseudo bonus state, and the pseudo bonus type 8 is associated with the sixth pseudo bonus state.

  Further, the pseudo bonus types 5 and 6 are associated with the first and second pseudo bonus states, respectively, and when the pseudo bonus types 5 and 6 are selected, the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state is executed. It is configured as follows.

  Since the first and second pseudo bonus states are associated with the pseudo bonus types 5 and 6, the sub control circuit 101 performs the pseudo bonus promotion lottery (see step S757 in FIG. 155) in the third specific effect state. ), When the end condition (described later) for ending the third specific effect state without winning the pseudo bonus type 7 is satisfied, the sub game state is shifted to the first and second pseudo bonus states. Is configured to do.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment changes the sub game state to the first and second simulated game states even in the simulated bonus promotion game state, even when the transition to the pseudo bonus added state (described later) is not determined. In order to shift to the bonus state, many benefits can be given to the player, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

  The pseudo bonus color type is a value used to identify a symbol combination that can be displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 when the sub control circuit 101 shifts the gaming state to each pseudo bonus state. The bonus color type 1 is associated with the display of “red BAR-red BAR-red BAR”, the pseudo bonus color type 2 is associated with the display of “blue BAR-blue BAR-blue BAR”, and the pseudo bonus color type 3 Is associated with the display of “red BAR-red BAR-blue BAR”, the pseudo bonus color type 4 is associated with the display of “blue BAR-blue BAR-red BAR”, and the pseudo bonus color type 5 is “white BAR”. -White BAR-White BAR ".

  The pseudo bonus promotion gaming state flag is a value used by the sub-control circuit 101 to determine whether or not to execute a pseudo bonus promotion gaming state, which will be described later, and when the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state flag is 1. The pseudo bonus promotion gaming state is executed.

  The pseudo bonus navigation counter is associated with the number of times that the eight-bell push order navigation is executed in each pseudo bonus game state.

  Here, the first to fourth pseudo bonus states are based on the pseudo bonus color types associated with each other, and in the following description, the first pseudo bonus state is the red same color pseudo bonus state, and the second pseudo bonus state is blue. The same color pseudo-bonus state, the third pseudo-bonus state will be referred to as a red different color pseudo-bonus state, and the fourth pseudo-bonus state will be referred to as a blue different-color pseudo bonus state. Further, in the fifth pseudo bonus state, the pseudo bonus color type is 1, but the pseudo bonus ART lottery (see (a) of FIGS. 56 to 58 in the pseudo bonus middle processing (see FIGS. 141 and 142) described later). ), (B)), when a pseudo bonus transition symbol (to be described later) is displayed, a pseudo-bonus ART lottery table with a high probability of winning an AT winning number having a content that adds the number of sets in the AT state ( 58 (a) and 58 (b)), the pseudo special game added state in the present embodiment is configured, and in the following description, the fifth pseudo bonus state is also referred to as the pseudo bonus added state. Describe. The sixth pseudo bonus state is also referred to as a special pseudo bonus state in the following description from the associated pseudo bonus navigation counter.

<Normal pseudo bonus lottery table>
The normal time pseudo bonus lottery tables shown in FIGS. 46A to 46D are tables that are referred to when the pseudo bonus type lottery is executed in the normal medium processing shown in FIGS. 135 and 136.

  As shown in FIGS. 46A to 46C, the normal time pseudo bonus lottery table is configured such that different normal time pseudo bonus lottery tables are selected depending on the probability state selected by the sub-control circuit 101. Yes. For example, when the probability state is low probability, the normal time pseudo bonus lottery table shown in FIG.

  In addition, the normal pseudo bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 46D is a table that is selected when a pseudo bonus ceiling counter (described later) reaches a predetermined value, and includes “BAR loss”, “BAR alignment”, The winning probabilities for the respective types of pseudo bonuses are set so as to always win the first to fourth or sixth pseudo bonus states when an internal winning combination other than “add-on BAR” is won.

  In each normal pseudo bonus lottery table, each pseudo bonus type is associated with a different lottery value for each internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 46 (c), the normal pseudo bonus lottery table selected when the probability state is extremely high is shown in FIG. 46 (a), ( Compared with the normal pseudo bonus lottery table shown in b), the winning probability of each pseudo bonus type is set higher.

<Pseudo bonus promotion lottery table>
47 and 48, the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table shown in each of (a) to (e) of FIG. 138 includes the precursory process shown in FIG. 138, the pseudo bonus transition process shown in FIG. 140, and the first one shown in FIGS. 147 and 148. 15 is a table that is referred to when a pseudo bonus promotion lottery is executed in the AT state process, the second AT state process shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, and the pseudo bonus promotion game state process shown in FIG. 155. Here, the promotion lottery is a process of determining by lottery whether or not the currently awarded pseudo bonus state is promoted to a pseudo bonus state that is more advantageous to the player.

  47 and 48, the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table includes the pseudo bonus color type of each control process executed by the sub-control circuit 101 and the pseudo bonus state currently being won. Different pseudo bonus promotion lottery tables are selected. For example, the pseudo-bonus color in which the sub-control circuit 101 executes the warning sign lottery process and the pseudo-bonus color type in the pseudo-bonus state that is currently being won can display the same color combination in the pseudo-bonus confirmation screen effect In the case of types 1 and 2, the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 47A is selected.

  In each pseudo bonus promotion lottery table, each pseudo bonus state that can be promoted is associated with a different lottery value for each internal winning combination. As shown in FIGS. 47A to 47E, the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table selected when the pseudo bonus color type is the pseudo bonus color type 1 or 2, the pseudo value of the pseudo bonus type 5 to 7 is used for the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table. It is associated with the bonus state. As shown in FIGS. 48A to 48E, the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table selected when the pseudo bonus color type is the pseudo bonus color type 3 or 4 has a lottery value of the pseudo bonus type 1 or 2 as shown in FIGS. Are associated with the pseudo bonus state.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the pachislot machine 1 has a symbol combination of the same symbol as compared to a pseudo bonus state in which a symbol combination of a different symbol can be displayed when the gaming state moves to the pseudo bonus state. The pseudo bonus state that can be displayed is configured to be more advantageous to the player.

<Pseudo bonus confirmation screen production navigation lottery table>
The pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect navigation lottery table shown in each of (a) to (e) of FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 is executed in order to shift the gaming state to the pseudo bonus state in the pseudo bonus transition process shown in FIG. It is a table referred when determining push order navigation.

  As shown in each of (a) to (e) of FIGS. 49 and 50, the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect navigation lottery table is managed by the pseudo bonus type and main control circuit 91 in the pseudo bonus state being won. Different pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect navigation lottery tables are selected depending on the effect game state.

  As shown in FIGS. 49 (a), (c), (e), and FIG. 50 (b), the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect navigation lottery table selected when the effect game state is the effect game state 0 When the replay and each push order bell are won, if the internal winning combination is a normal replay, a pseudo special game state transition symbol that is a symbol corresponding to the pseudo bonus color type of the pseudo bonus state that is won is displayed on the reel display window 4 Push order navigation that can be displayed in the middle row (for example, when the pseudo bonus color type is pseudo bonus color type 1, “red-BAR-red BAR-red BAR” can be aligned in the middle row of the reel display window 4 “middle-right” -Left ") is executed, and if the internal winning combination is a push order bell, a push order navigation for winning the eight bell combination is executed.

  49 (b), (d), FIG. 50 (a), and (c), the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect navigation lottery table selected when the effect game state is the effect game state 1 is: When each normal replay is won, a push order navigation that can display a symbol corresponding to the pseudo bonus color type in the pseudo bonus state that is won in each normal replay in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 is executed. It is configured not to execute push order navigation when winning a prize.

  Thereby, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment wins the pseudo bonus state, and when the sub control circuit 101 executes the pseudo bonus transition process, if the staging game state is the staging gaming state 0, the push order By performing push order navigation when winning the bell and winning the 8 bell combination, the main control circuit 91 can shift the effect gaming state from the effect game state 0 to the effect game state 1. Further, if the pachislot machine 1 is the production game state 1, the main control circuit 91 changes the production game state from the production game state 1 to the production game state 2 by not performing the push order navigation of the push order bell. Can be prevented from being transferred to.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (d), the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect navigation lottery table selected when the effect game state is the effect game state 2 to 4 is the normal replay regardless of the type of the pseudo bonus color that is won. And, when the push order bell is won, the push order navigation is not executed.

  As a result, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not execute the push order navigation when the effect gaming state is the effect gaming states 2 to 4 when the sub control circuit 101 executes the pseudo bonus transition process. Thus, by winning a single bell combination when the pushing order is won, the main control circuit 91 can shift the effect game state from the effect game states 2 to 4 to the effect game state 0.

  FIG. 50 (e) shows that when the push order navigation is not executed and the penalty state set when the stop other than the left stop button 19L is operated for the first time when the push order is won is executed. This is a pseudo-bonus confirmation screen effect navigation lottery table that is selected regardless of the pseudo-bonus color type in the pseudo-bonus state and the effect gaming state, and is configured not to execute push-order navigation when winning a normal replay and push-order bell. Has been.

<ART reference table>
The ART reference table shown in FIG. 51 is a table in which the contents of each effect in the AT state set in the common process after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 are set.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the ART reference table, each AT winning number has “ART success / failure” related to the success / failure of the AT state, and the gaming state is shifted to the first AT state after the end of the second AT state. “Loop reference” relating to the loop rate as a continuation probability that is a probability, “ART set number” relating to the number of continuations that is the number of times that one set of AT states is continuously executed, and a special that will be described later Information relating to “the number of special mode 6 sets” relating to the number of times the special mode 6 is set as the special mode among the modes is associated. Further, the ART content shown in FIG. 51 indicates the content of information associated with each AT winning number.

  Here, when the sub-control circuit 101 wins each AT winning number by the ART lottery, the information related to the ART winning / nothing, loop reference, ART set number and special mode 6 set number associated with the corresponding AT winning number. Are each stored in a predetermined area. For example, ART success / failure is stored in the ART success / failure storage area, and the special mode 6 set number is stored in the special mode 6 stock counter.

  As shown in FIG. 51, since the AT winning number 1 is associated with “0” in which all of the ART winning / rejecting, loop reference, ART set number, and special mode 6 set number are lost, the ART content is “ It's a “losing”.

  The AT winning numbers 2 to 6 are associated with “1”, which is the winning state of the AT state, as the ART success / failure, and are associated with “1” to “5” having different loop rates as loop references. , ART contents are “loop A” to “loop E”.

  Here, the loop references 1 to 5 are set to loop rates of 25%, 33%, 50%, 66%, and 80%, respectively, and are based on the selected loop rate after the end of the second AT state. Thus, by shifting the gaming state to the first AT state, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to continue the AT state.

  The loop reference is stored in the loop reference stock table. Here, when the loop reference stock table wins the AT winning number associated with the loop references 1 to 5 by the ART lottery, the loop reference corresponding to the corresponding AT winning number is the loop reference stock table. The loop reference stored at the end and the loop reference stored at the top of the loop reference stock table is a table set as a loop rate to be referred to in each control process.

  Since the AT winning numbers 7 to 10 are associated with “1” to “3” and “5” as the number of ART sets, respectively, the ART contents are “1set” to “3set” and “5set”. ing.

  Here, the ART set numbers “1” to “3” and “5” are associated with the number of sets in the AT state of 1 to 3 sets and 5 sets, respectively. Further, the AT winning numbers 7 to 10 are associated with “0” which does not win the AT state as the ART winning / failing.

  For this reason, when the sub control circuit 101 wins the AT winning number associated with “1” as the ART winning or not and executes the AT state, the number of sets determined when winning the AT winning numbers 7 to 10 is determined. When the AT winning numbers 7 to 10 are won to execute the AT state for the minute, the number of AT state sets corresponding to the number of ART sets is provided in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 103 in the sub-control circuit 101. The set number is added to the loop stock table, and the set number is stocked.

Since the AT winning numbers 11 and 12 are respectively associated with “1” and “2” as the number of special mode 6 sets, the ART contents are “special mode 6 1set” and “special mode 6”.
2set ".

  Here, the number of special mode 6 sets “1” and “2” are associated with the number of sets of the special mode 6 of 1, 2 sets, respectively.

Since the AT winning numbers 13 to 21 have a plurality of contents each of the AT winning numbers 2 to 12 described above, the ART content is “1set + special mode” in accordance with the contents of each AT winning number 13 to 21. 6 1set ”,“ Loop D + 1set ”,“ Loop E + 1set ”,“ Loop D + 3set ”,“ Loop E + 3set ”,“ Loop D + Special Mode 6 ”
“1set”, “loop E + special mode 6 1set”, “loop D + special mode 6 2set”, and “loop E + special mode 6 2set”.

  Here, although the AT winning numbers 14 to 17 are associated with the loop rate and the number of sets in the AT state, they are associated with “0” that does not win the AT state as the ART success / failure. For this reason, when the sub control circuit 101 wins the AT winning number associated with “1” as the ART winning / failing and executes the AT state, the number of sets determined when winning the AT winning numbers 14 to 17 is determined. Whether or not to continue the AT state based on the loop rate determined when the AT winning numbers 14 to 17 are won after the execution of the determined number of AT states. Execute.

  The sub RAM 103 that stocks the loop rate in the loop reference stock table and stocks the number of sets in the loop stock table constitutes a continuation information storage unit.

  In the following description, “winning the ART contents” means winning the AT winning number having the corresponding ART contents.

<ART lottery table for normal bonus bonus>
The normal-time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table as the specific effect state lottery table shown in each of FIGS. 52 to 54 is a pseudo-bonus type lottery in the normal medium processing shown in FIGS. 135 and 136. This table is referred to when the ART lottery is executed at the time of winning.

  As shown in each of FIGS. 52 to 54, the normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table is different depending on the normal mode and the probability state selected by the sub-control circuit 101. The ART lottery table is selected when the bonus is won. For example, when the normal mode is the normal mode 1 and the probability state is low probability, the normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table shown in FIG. 52A is selected.

  As shown in each of (a) to (c) of FIGS. 52 to 54, in each normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table, each ART content is associated with a lottery value for each winning pseudo bonus state. ing.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 54A to 54C, the normal-time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table selected when the probability state is extremely high is selected when the probability state is low or high. 52 and FIG. 53, the winning probability of the ART contents “Loop B” to “Loop E” is set higher than the normal lottery table at the time of the normal pseudo bonus state shown in (a) to (c) of FIG. ing.

  Here, when each ART content is won, the sub-control circuit 101 refers to the ART reference table shown in FIG. 51 and associates the ART content of the winning ART content with “1” which is the AT state win. It is determined whether or not the AT state has been won. In the following description, when the ART lottery is executed, the sub control circuit 101 determines the ART content based on the lottery value defined in each table, and refers to the ART reference table to determine the determined ART content. It is determined whether or not the AT state is won by referring to the information related to the corresponding ART success / failure.

<ART lottery table during pseudo bonus winning during pseudo bonus winning>
55 is a table that is referred to when the ART lottery is executed when the pseudo bonus lottery during the pseudo bonus is won in the pseudo bonus transition process shown in FIG. 140. .

As shown in FIG. 55, in the ART bonus lottery table during pseudo bonus winning, a lottery value is associated with each ART content for each winning pseudo bonus state.

<Art lottery table during pseudo bonus>
The pseudo-bonus ART lottery tables shown in FIGS. 56 to 58 shown in FIGS. 56A to 58B are tables that are referred to when the ART lottery is executed in the pseudo-bonus medium processing shown in FIGS. 141 and 142. .

  As shown in (a) and (b) of FIGS. 56 to 58, different pseudo bonus ART lottery tables are selected as the ART bonus lottery table during the pseudo bonus depending on whether or not the ART is successful and the pseudo bonus state being executed. It is configured as follows. For example, in the state where the ART win is “0”, that is, the AT state is non-winning, and the pseudo bonus state is the first and second pseudo bonus states, ie, the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect “red BAR−red BAR−red BAR” ”Or“ blue BAR-blue BAR-blue BAR ”is being executed, the pseudo-bonus ART lottery table shown in FIG. 56A is selected.

  As shown in each of (a) and (b) of FIGS. 56 to 58, in each pseudo bonus ART lottery table, each ART content is associated with a lottery value for each internal winning combination. As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, each of the pseudo-bonus ART lottery tables selected when the ART success is “0” includes “common bell”, “weak cherry”, When “strong cherry”, “chance replay”, and “chance eye” are won, the lottery values of the ART contents “loop B” to “loop E” with the ART success / failure “1” are high. Further, as shown in each of FIGS. 56 to 58 (b), the pseudo bonus medium ART lottery table selected when the ART win is “1” has “common bell” and “weak cherry” as internal winning combinations. ”,“ Strong Cherry ”,“ Chance Replay ”and“ Chance Eye ”, the ART success / failure is“ 0 ”, and the lottery value of the ART content“ 1set ”that stocks one set of the AT state becomes high ing.

  As shown in FIGS. 56A to 58B, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 102 that executes various control processes in the sub control circuit 101 has the same color transition pattern as the pseudo bonus type. When winning a bonus bonus type 1 or 2 that can win a prize, the ART win is associated with winning an AT state more than when winning a pseudo bonus type 3 or 4 where a different color transition symbol can be won as a pseudo bonus type. It is structured to make it easy to win the AT winning number.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can provide a difference in the winning probability of the AT state between the case of the same-color transition symbol and the case of the different-color transition symbol, so that it can change depending on the game characteristics. Can do.

<ART Navi lottery table>
The ART navigation lottery tables shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B are the first AT state processing shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, the second AT state processing shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, and FIG. In the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state shown, it is a table that is referred to when pushing order navigation is determined when the pushing order bell is won.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the ART navigation lottery table is configured so that different ART navigation lottery tables are selected depending on the effect gaming state managed by the main control circuit 91.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the ART navigation lottery table selected when the production game state is the production game state 2 to 4 is a push that wins the 8 bell combination when winning each push order bell. It is configured to perform forward navigation.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the ART navigation lottery table selected when the production game state is the production game state 0 or 1 wins an 8-bell combination when winning each push order bell. It is configured to execute push order navigation.

  As a result, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the sub control circuit 101 executes the AT state or the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state, if the staging gaming state is the staging gaming state 0, 1, the push order bell By performing push order navigation at the time of winning and winning the eight bell combination, the main control circuit 91 can shift the effect game state from effect game states 0, 1 to effect game states 2-4.

<Special table lottery table>
The special table lottery table shown in FIG. 60 is a table that is referred to when determining the special table in the first AT state start pre-processing shown in FIGS. 145 and 146.

  As shown in FIG. 60, in the setting change normal mode reference table lottery table, lottery values different in setting values “1” to “6” are associated with the winning probability of each table.

  Here, the special table is composed of special tables 1-50. Each special table is a table composed of special table information 0 to 24. When a special mode table used for determining a special mode is determined, the special table and the special table information are Used. Each special table information is initialized in the first AT state start pre-processing when the special mode is not set, and the number of the currently selected special table information is selected by continuing the AT state. The special table information added with 1 is used in the next pre-processing for starting the first AT state.

<Special mode table reference table>
The special mode table reference table shown in FIG. 61 is a table that is referred to when determining the special mode table in the first AT state start pre-process shown in FIGS. 145 and 146.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the special mode table is determined from the special table selected by the sub control circuit 101 and the special table information. For example, when the special table 1 is selected as the special table and the special table information 0 is selected as the special table information, the special mode table is determined as the special mode table 11.

  Here, the special mode table is a table composed of the special mode tables 1 to 17 and is used when the special mode is determined in the first AT state start pre-processing shown in FIGS. 145 and 146.

<First AT state start special mode table ART lottery table>
The first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B is used when the ART lottery is executed in the first AT state start pre-process shown in FIGS. 145 and 146. It is a table to be referenced.

  As shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B, the first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table is a first AT state game number lottery stored in a predetermined area of the sub-control circuit 101. The first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table, which is different depending on the flag selected in the state, is selected.

  The first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table shown in FIG. 62A is referred to when the normal state flag or the second AT state pseudo bonus state continuation flag is selected as the AT state flag. Is done. The first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table shown in FIG. 62B is referred to when the first AT state pseudo bonus continuation flag is selected as the AT state flag.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b), in the first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table, the contents of the ART contents “lost”, “special mode 6 3set” and “special mode 6 5set” are determined. A lottery value is associated with each probability for each of the special mode tables 1 to 17.

<Special mode transition lottery table at the start of the first AT state>
The first AT state start special mode transition lottery table shown in each of (a) to (c) of FIGS. 63 to 71 indicates that the special mode is set in the first AT state start pre-process shown in FIGS. 145 and 146. It is a table that is referred to when making a decision.

  As shown in each of (a) to (c) of FIGS. 63 to 71, the special mode transition lottery table at the start of the first AT state is the special mode selected by the sub control circuit 101 and the sub control circuit 101. The first AT state start special mode transition lottery table which is different depending on the flag selected in the special mode lottery state stored in the predetermined area is selected. For example, when the special mode 1 is selected as the special mode and the normal time flag is selected as the AT state flag, the first AT state start special mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 63A is selected. The

  As shown in each of (a) to (c) of FIGS. 63 to 71, in the first AT state start special mode transition lottery table, the winning probability of each special mode differs in the special mode tables 1 to 17. A lottery value is associated.

<Pseudo bonus lottery table during the first AT state>
The first AT state pseudo bonus lottery table shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B is referred to when the pseudo bonus type lottery is executed in the first AT state processing shown in FIGS. 147 and 148. It is a table.

  As shown in FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b), the first AT state pseudo bonus lottery table is different in the first AT state pseudo bonus depending on the AT state probability state selected by the sub-control circuit 101. A lottery table is configured to be selected. For example, when the AT probability state is normal in the same color, the first AT state pseudo bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 72A is selected.

  In each first AT state pseudo bonus lottery table, each pseudo bonus type is associated with a different lottery value for each internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the first AT state pseudo bonus lottery table selected when the AT probability state is the same color high probability is selected when the AT probability state is normal. Compared to the pseudo bonus lottery table during the first AT state shown in (a), the winning probability of the pseudo bonus types 1 and 2 for displaying the same color symbol combination in the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect is high, In addition, the winning probability of the pseudo bonus types 3 and 4 that can display different color symbol combinations in the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect is set low.

<Pseudo bonus lottery table during second AT state>
The second AT state pseudo bonus lottery table shown in each of FIGS. 73 to 82 (a) and (b) executes the pseudo bonus type lottery in the second AT state processing shown in FIGS. It is a table that is referenced when doing so.

  As shown in FIGS. 73 to 82, (a) and (b), the second AT state pseudo bonus lottery table differs depending on the special mode selected by the sub-control circuit 101 and the in-AT probability state. The pseudo bonus lottery table is selected during the second AT state. For example, when the special mode is the special mode 1 and the probability state during AT is normal in the same color, the second pseudo bonus lottery table during the AT state shown in FIG. 73A is selected.

  In each second AT state pseudo bonus lottery table, each pseudo bonus type is associated with a different lottery value for each internal winning combination. As shown in FIGS. 73 to 82 (b), the second AT state pseudo bonus lottery table selected when each AT probability state is highly likely to be the same color is selected when the AT probability state is normal. Compared to the pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state shown in FIGS. 73 to 82 (a), pseudo bonus color types 1 and 2 that can display the same color symbol combination in the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect. The winning probability of the pseudo bonus types of the pseudo bonus color types 3 and 4 in which the winning probability of the type is high and different symbol combinations can be displayed in the pseudo bonus finalizing screen effect is set low.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 73 to 82 (b), in the second AT state pseudo bonus lottery table selected when each AT probability state is highly likely to have the same color, the AT probability state is the same color normal. Compared to the pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state shown in FIGS. 73 to 82 (a), which is sometimes selected, the winning probability of the pseudo bonus types 5 and 6 is set higher.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can easily shift to the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state by the combination of replay symbols displayed in the symbol display area of the liquid crystal display device 11 in the AT state. This suggests that the player can be interested in the winning combination in the AT state, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 74 (a), (b), 77 (a), (b), 78 (a), (b), 80 (a), (b), a special mode is provided. The second AT state pseudo bonus lottery table selected when mode 2 is selected is compared with the other second AT state pseudo bonus lottery tables as an internal winning combination and wins “chance replay”. In such a case, the winning probability of each pseudo bonus type is set high.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 75 (a), (b), 77 (a), (b), 79 (a), (b), 80 (a), and (b), a special mode is provided. The pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state selected when mode 3 is selected is compared with the pseudo bonus lottery table during the other second AT state and wins the “common bell” as an internal winning combination. In such a case, the winning probability of each pseudo bonus type is set high.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 76 (a), (b), 78 (a), (b), 79 (a), (b), 80 (a), (b), a special mode is provided. The second AT state pseudo bonus lottery table selected when mode 4 is selected is compared with the other second AT state pseudo bonus lottery tables as “weak cherry” and “ When the “strong cherry” is won, the winning probability of each pseudo bonus type is set high.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 81 (a), 81 (b), 82 (a), and 82 (b), during the second AT state selected when the special modes 5 and 6 are selected as the special mode. The pseudo bonus lottery table is compared to the other bonus bonus lottery table during the second AT state when “chance replay”, “common bell”, “weak cherry”, and “strong cherry” are won as internal winning combinations. The winning probability for each pseudo bonus type is set high.

<ART lottery table when pseudo bonus is won during AT state>
The pseudo lottery table during the AT bonus during AT state shown in FIGS. 83 and 84 is shown in the first AT state processing shown in FIGS. 147 and 148 and FIGS. 149 to 151. It is a table referred in the case of the ART lottery executed when winning in the pseudo bonus type lottery in the second AT state process.

  As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, (a) and (b), the AT lottery table in the AT state is determined according to the AT state being executed and the special mode selected for the sub game circuit 101, respectively. The ART lottery table is selected when the pseudo bonus is won in different AT states.

  83 (a) and 84 (a), the AT lottery table in the AT state is determined when the first AT state is executed, and when the special mode 6 is selected. 84 (a) is referred to. In addition, the AT lottery table during the AT state pseudo-bonus shown in FIGS. 83B and 84B is referred to when the second AT state is executed, and the special mode 6 is selected. In that case, reference is made to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the ART contents “lost”, “1set”, “special mode 6 1set”, “loop” D + special mode 6 3set ”,“ loop E + special mode 6 3set ”,“ loop D + special mode 6 5set ”and“ loop E + special mode 6 5set ”winning probabilities correspond to lottery values for each winning bonus state It is attached.

<ART loop lottery table>
85 (a) to 85 (g), the ART loop lottery table sets the gaming state to the first AT state after the end of the second AT state in the first AT state start pre-processing shown in FIGS. 145 and 146. It is a table that is referred to when executing an ART loop lottery for lottering whether or not to continue the AT state by shifting.

  As shown in FIGS. 85A to 85G, the ART loop lottery table is configured such that different ART loop lottery tables are selected depending on the control information controlled by the sub-control circuit 101.

  The ART loop lottery table shown in FIG. 85A is an ART loop lottery table selected when the conditions for selecting the ART lottery table shown in FIGS. 85B to 85G are not satisfied. The winning probability of each AT continuation type is associated with a lottery value for each loop rate determined by the ART lottery. For example, when the ART content won in the ART lottery is Loop A in which the AT state continues with a probability of 25%, it is configured to win a continuation or special continuation with a probability of 25%.

  The ART lottery table shown in FIG. 85 (b) is an ART loop lottery table selected when an AT state is stocked in a predetermined area of the sub-control circuit 101. The winning probability of each AT continuation type is associated with a lottery value so as to always win a continuation or special continuation regardless of the ART contents determined by the ART lottery.

  The ART lottery table shown in FIG. 85C is an ART loop lottery table selected when the special mode 6 is selected as the special mode. The winning probability of each AT continuation type is associated with a lottery value so as to always win a continuation or special continuation regardless of the ART contents determined by the ART lottery.

  The ART lottery table shown in FIG. 85 (d) is an ART loop lottery table selected when the pseudo bonus continuation flag during the first AT state is selected as the loop lottery state. The winning probability of each AT continuation type is associated with a lottery value so as to always win a continuation or special continuation regardless of the ART contents determined by the ART lottery.

  In the ART lottery table shown in FIG. 85 (e), the ART loop selected when the pseudo bonus continuation flag during the first AT state is selected as the loop lottery state and special continuation is won in the previous ART loop lottery. It is a lottery table. The winning probability of each AT continuation type is associated with a lottery value so that a special continuation is always won regardless of the ART content determined by the ART lottery.

  The ART lottery table shown in FIG. 85 (f) is an ART loop lottery table selected when the pseudo bonus continuation flag during the third AT state is selected as the loop lottery state. The winning probability of each AT continuation type is associated with a lottery value so as to always win a continuation or special continuation regardless of the ART contents determined by the ART lottery.

  In the ART lottery table shown in FIG. 85 (g), the ART loop selected when the pseudo bonus continuation flag during the second AT state is selected as the loop lottery state and the special continuation is won in the previous ART loop lottery. It is a lottery table. The winning probability of each AT continuation type is associated with a lottery value so as to always win a continuation or special continuation regardless of the ART contents determined by the ART lottery.

<Special mode transition lottery table for special continuation>
The special continuation special mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 86 is a table referred to when the special mode is determined in the second AT state initial process shown in FIG. 152.

  As shown in FIG. 86, in the special continuation special mode transition lottery table, the special mode is associated with a different lottery value for each special mode that is currently selected. The lottery value is set so that the mode transition lottery shifts to the same special mode as the currently selected special mode or the special mode advantageous to the player as compared with the currently selected special mode.

<ART lottery table when special conditions are met>
The ART lottery table when the special condition is satisfied shown in FIG. 87 is a table referred to when the ART lottery is executed in the second AT state end process shown in FIG. 153.

  As shown in FIG. 87, a lottery value is associated with each ART content in the ART lottery table when the special condition is satisfied.

<Art lottery table when running a bonus bonus>
The pseudo bonus added state execution lottery table shown in FIG. 88 is a table that is referred to when the ART lottery is executed in the pseudo bonus state end processing shown in FIGS. 143 and 144.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the ART bonus lottery table at the time of pseudo bonus extra state execution, the contents of each ART are respectively determined by the value of a pseudo bonus extra counter (described later) stored in a predetermined area of the sub-control circuit 101. Different lottery values are associated with each other.

<Regular sign game number lottery table>
The normal sign game number lottery tables shown in FIGS. 89 to 94 are tables that are referred to when determining the number of games in which the predicate state is executed in the normal medium process shown in FIGS. 135 and 136.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 to 94, the normal sign game number lottery table shows whether or not the pseudo bonus state is true, whether or not the AT state is true when the pseudo bonus state is won, the normal mode and the probability state selected by the sub-control circuit 101. Different normal time game number lottery tables are selected according to each. For example, in the case where the pseudo bonus state is not won, the normal mode is the normal mode 1, and the probability state is low probability, the normal time precursor game number lottery table shown in FIG. 89 (a) is selected. .

  In each normal sign game number lottery table, each sign game number, which is the number of times the sign state is executed, is associated with a different lottery value for each internal winning combination. 93 and 94, the normal sign game number lottery table selected when the probability state is extremely high is shown in FIGS. 89 to 92 when the probability state is low or high. Compared with the normal time precursor game number lottery table shown, the winning probability of each precursor game number with a large number of games is set higher.

<First AT state game number lottery table>
The first AT state game number lottery table shown in FIG. 95 is the first AT state game number as the number of games in the first AT state in the first AT state start preprocessing shown in FIGS. It is a table that is referred to when determining.

  As shown in FIG. 95, in the first AT state game number random determination table, the sub-control circuit 101 is selected for each first AT state game number that is the number of times the first AT state is executed. A lottery value is associated with each AT state flag.

<The first AT state game number extra lottery table>
The first AT state game number extra lottery table shown in FIGS. 96A and 96B executes the extra lottery for adding the first AT state game number in the pseudo bonus medium process shown in FIGS. 141 and 142. It is a table that is referenced when doing so.

  As shown in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), the first AT state game number additional lottery table is different depending on whether or not the AT winning number for stocking the number of sets in the ART bonus lottery during the pseudo bonus is determined. The lottery table is selected so that the number of state games is added.

  The AT lottery table during pseudo bonus winning during the AT state shown in FIG. 96A is referred to when the AT winning number for stocking the number of sets in the similar bonus ART lottery is not won. Also, the first AT state game number extra lottery table shown in FIG. 96B is referred to when an AT winning number for stocking the number of sets in the similar bonus ART lottery is won.

  As shown in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), in the first AT state game number additional lottery table, the first AT state game number added is associated with a lottery value for each internal winning combination. If you win “Common Bell”, “Weak Cherry”, “Strong Cherry”, “Chance Replay” and “Chance Eye” as an internal winning combination, the number of games in the first AT state game is added. It is a lottery value.

<Second AT state game number lottery table>
The second AT state game number lottery tables shown in FIGS. 97 to 102 show the second AT state game number as the number of games in the second AT state in the second AT state initial process shown in FIG. It is a table that is referred to when making a decision.

  97 to 102, the second AT state game number lottery table is selected by the second AT state game number lottery table which is different depending on the AT continuation type selected by the sub-control circuit 101 and the special mode. It is configured to be. For example, when the AT continuation type is “no continuation” and any one of the special modes 1 to 5 is selected as the special mode, the second AT state game number random determination table shown in FIG. 97 is selected. .

  As shown in FIGS. 97 to 102, in the second AT state game number random determination table, each second AT state game number that is the number of times the second AT state is executed is determined by the ART random determination. Different lottery values are associated with each loop rate. As shown in FIGS. 100 to 102, the second AT state game number random determination table selected when a plurality of special modes are selected is selected when one special mode is selected. Compared with the second AT state game number lottery table shown in FIG. 99, the winning probability of each second AT state game number having a large number of games is set higher.

<First pseudo bonus selection production announcement timing lottery table>
The first pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery table shown in FIGS. 103 and 104 is shown in FIG. 156 when the player selects the first pseudo bonus selection effect. It is a table that is referred to when determining at which notification timing it is determined whether or not to win the ART in the process of receiving a winning action command.

  As shown in (a) to (c) of FIGS. 103 and 104, the first pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery table differs depending on the loop rate of the winning AT state. It is comprised so that the notification timing lottery table at the time of selection effect may be selected. For example, if the winning AT state loop rate is loop A, the first pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery table shown in FIG. 103 (b) is selected.

  As shown in FIGS. 103 and 104 (a) to (c), in the first pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery table, the set value selected by the main control circuit 91 at each announcement timing. Different lottery values are associated with each other.

  Here, each of the first pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery tables selected when the ART win / failure is won has a set value selected by the main control circuit 91 according to the announcement timing won as a result of the lottery. It is configured so that it can be suggested. For example, the notification timing 3 is configured to have a high probability of winning when the setting “1”, the setting “3”, and the setting “5” having the odd set values are selected.

<Second pseudo bonus selection production announcement timing lottery table>
The second pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery table shown in each of FIGS. 105 and 106 is shown in FIG. 156 when the player selects the second pseudo bonus selection effect. It is a table that is referred to when determining at which notification timing it is determined whether or not to win the ART in the process of receiving a winning action command.

  As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the second pseudo bonus selection effect time announcement timing lottery table is different depending on the set value selected by the main control circuit 91. A pseudo-bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery table is selected. For example, when the setting value selected by the main control circuit 91 is “1”, the second pseudo bonus selection effect notification timing lottery table shown in FIG. 105A is selected.

  As shown in (a) to (c) of FIGS. 105 and 106, in the second pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery table, each announcement timing is selected according to the loop rate of the winning AT state. Different lottery values are associated with each set value.

  Here, each second pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery table is configured to indicate which loop rate of the winning AT state is based on the announcement timing won as a result of lottery. For example, the notification timing 4 is configured to win when the loop C to the loop E are selected as the loop rate.

<End effect lottery table when third pseudo bonus selection effect is executed>
The third pseudo bonus selection effect execution end effect lottery table shown in FIG. 107 is simulated in the pseudo bonus end time process shown in FIGS. 143 and 144 when the player selects the third pseudo bonus selection effect. It is a table referred when determining the effect which alert | reports that the bonus state was complete | finished.

  As shown in FIG. 107, end effect numbers 1 to 37 are associated with each end effect for informing that the pseudo bonus state has ended. Also, as shown in FIG. 107, in the third pseudo bonus selection effect execution end effect lottery table, for each end effect, the normal mode selected in the next game and the third pseudo bonus selection effect are selected. In the ART lottery executed when the pseudo bonus state is won, when the AT state is won, a different lottery value is associated with the loop rate of the corresponding AT state.

  Here, in the third pseudo bonus selection effect execution end effect lottery table, either the normal mode selected in the next game or the loop rate of the AT state being won is determined by the end effect won as a result of the lottery. It is configured to suggest.

  The end effect is composed of a normal end effect and first to third special end effects, and the contents of the effects are different from each other. Each end effect is composed of nine types of end effects: four types of end effects that suggest the normal mode selected in the next game, and five types of end effects that indicate the loop rate of the winning AT state. Each is composed.

  For example, the normal end effect is a normal end effect 1 to 4 indicating a normal mode selected in the next game, a normal end effect AT winning time 1 to 5 indicating a loop rate of the winning AT state, 9 types of end effects.

  Here, the normal end effects 1 and 2 can be won when any of the normal modes 1 to 5 is selected in the next game. Further, the normal end effect 3 can be won when the normal modes 3 to 5 are selected in the next game. The normal end effect 4 can be won when the normal mode 4 or 5 is selected in the next game.

  That is, when the normal end effect 4 is executed as the end effect, the player is suggested to win the AT state when the pseudo bonus state is won in the next and subsequent games. .

[Main game state transition]
<Transition of RT gaming state>
As shown in FIG. 108, in the pachislot machine 1, the main game state on the main control side controlled by the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8) is the general game state (RT0 game state), RT1 game state, and MB. There is a gaming state.

  The RT0 gaming state is an initial state when the pachislot machine 1 is shipped. The main gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state when the MB gaming state ends. The RT0 gaming state is a gaming state in which a winning number is drawn based on the internal gaming state lottery table (see FIG. 22), and is a replay low-probability state in which the winning probability of a normal replay as a re-gamer is low.

  The main gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state when the internal winning combination “F_MB” (winning number 51) is won during the RT0 gaming state.

  The RT1 gaming state is a gaming state in which a winning number is determined based on the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table (see FIG. 23), and is a replay high probability state in which the winning probability of normal replay is higher than the RT0 gaming state.

  Here, the RT1 gaming state is not an RT managed by the number of games, but continues unless the action symbol in the MB gaming state wins a prize. In that sense, the RT1 gaming state is infinite RT.

  The main gaming state shifts to the MB gaming state when the operation pattern (winning combination “C_MB1, 2”) in the MB gaming state wins during the RT1 gaming state.

  The MB gaming state is a gaming state in which all the small roles (see FIGS. 14 to 17) win internally, and when the number of payouts exceeds a predetermined number of payouts (30 in this embodiment). To finish.

  Although details will be described later, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment wins the internal winning combination “F_MB” with a high probability in the RT0 gaming state, and wins the action pattern in the MB gaming state in the RT1 gaming state. Since it is difficult, the main gaming state is approximately the RT1 gaming state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, on the condition that “F_MB” as the predetermined bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the main game state is shifted to the bonus flag carry-over state and the operation pattern related to MB On the condition that the combination (also referred to as an operating combination) is displayed on a winning line to be described later, the main gaming state is shifted from the bonus flag carryover state to the MB gaming state as the bonus gaming state.

  The transition from the main game state to the bonus flag carry-over state or the MB game state is performed by the main CPU 93 (see FIG. 8).

  Note that in the MB gaming state of the present embodiment, the number of medals (BET number) and the number of payouts are set in order to play a unit game so that medals given to the player do not increase. . For example, when two sheets are inserted (two sheets BET), two medals are paid out, so that medals given to the player can be prevented from increasing.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the RT1 gaming state is set while the main gaming state is in the above-described bonus flag carry-over state. Thus, by setting the bonus flag carry-over state to the RT1 gaming state, the number of RT gaming states managed by the main control circuit 91 can be effectively reduced to one. The amount of data handled can be reduced, and the load on the main control circuit 91 can be greatly reduced by the pseudo bonus game.

[Main control processing]
The main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 artificially changes the effect game state on the main control side according to the transition diagram shown in FIG. 109, and executes various processes according to the flowcharts shown in FIGS.

<Changes in production gaming status>
As shown in FIG. 109, the present pachislot machine 1 has a normal state (effect game state 0), a preparation state (effect game state 1), a specific effect state ( There are an ART state (effect game state 2) that is an AT state), a pseudo bonus state (effect game state 3) that is a pseudo special game state, and a special (premium) pseudo bonus state (effect game state 4).

  The transition of the effect game states 0 to 4 on the main control side is performed in order to execute a game lock effect that temporarily locks the progress of the game at the start and end of the pseudo bonus.

  In the effect game state 0, the effect game state shifts to the effect game state 1 on the condition that the combination of the operation symbols related to the above-mentioned eight bells is displayed on the winning line. In the effect game state 0, the effect game state transitions to the effect game state 3 on condition that the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are pressed in a specific pressing order when the above-described normal replay is won.

  In the production game state 1, when the above-described push order bell is won, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are pressed in the push order in which the eight-bell combination cannot be won, and the eight-bell combination is not displayed. In the case of “spilling” (when one medal is acquired), the production gaming state shifts to the production gaming state 0. In the effect game state 1, the effect game state shifts to the effect game state 2 on the condition that the combination of the operation symbols related to the above-mentioned eight bells is displayed on the winning line. In the effect game state 1, the effect game state shifts to the effect game state 3 on condition that the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are pressed in a specific pressing order when the above-described normal replay is won. In the effect game state 1, the effect game state shifts to the effect game state 4 on condition that the combination of the operation symbols related to the above-mentioned premium flag (F_Premier Lip) is displayed on the winning line.

  In the production game state 2, when the pushing order bell is won, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are pushed in the pushing order in which the eight bell combination cannot be won, and the eight bell combination is not displayed. ”(When one medal is acquired), the effect game state shifts to the effect game state 0.

  In the effect game state 3, the effect game state shifts to the effect game state 4 on condition that the combination of the operation symbols related to the above-mentioned premium flag (F_Premier Lip) is displayed on the winning line.

  In production gaming states 3 and 4, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are pushed in the push order in which the eight-bell role cannot be won when the push-order bell is won, and the eight-bell role is not displayed. In the case of “spilling” (when one medal is acquired), the production gaming state shifts to the production gaming state 0. In the effect game states 3 and 4, the number of times (count value) of a pseudo bonus counter (not shown) is “8”, that is, the effect game state is changed to the effect game by winning 8 times for the 8 bells. Transition to state 2.

  Here, the main control circuit 91 executes the game lock effect at the start of the pseudo bonus by changing the effect game states 0 to 4 on condition that the winning of the specific winning combination and the specific pushing order are executed. In addition, it is possible to estimate a change in the secondary gaming state on the secondary control side.

<Main control processing>
FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the main control process. The main control process described below starts when the pachislot machine 1 is powered on.

  First, when the pachislot machine 1 is powered on, the main CPU 93 executes the power-on process shown in FIG. 111 (S10). In this power-on process, it is determined whether the backup is normal or the setting has been changed appropriately, and an initialization process is executed according to the determination result.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes an initialization process at the end of one game (one game) (S11). In this initialization process, for example, a storage area designated in advance to be initialized at the end of one game is initialized. As a result of this initialization processing, the data stored in the internal winning combination storing area, the display combination storing area, etc. of the main RAM 95 is cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a medal acceptance / start check process shown in FIG. 112 (S12). In the medal acceptance / start check process, a process for detecting a medal inserted by the player and a process for detecting a start operation are executed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 extracts three random number values (random number values 1 to 3) and stores them in a random number storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 (S13).

  Here, the random value 1 is a value used for the internal lottery process, and is extracted from 0 to 65535 in the present embodiment. The random numbers 2 and 3 are values used for other lottery processing, and are extracted from 0 to 65535 and 0 to 255, respectively, in the present embodiment.

  The main CPU 93 does not need to extract the random number values 2 and 3 in step S13, and may extract the random number values 2 and 3 when they are used.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes an internal lottery process shown in FIG. 113 (S14). The main CPU 93 that executes the internal lottery process constitutes an internal winning combination determining means.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel stop initial setting process shown in FIG. 114 (S15). By this reel stop initial setting process, information (for example, stop table number, etc.) relating to stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stored in the corresponding area of the main RAM 95 based on the result of the internal lottery process (internal winning combination). Is done.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated start command data in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 (S16).

  The start command data represents, for example, a game state flag type, a bonus end number counter value, an internal winning combination type, a flag type related to locking, etc., a value of an effect timer, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a wait process (S17). In this wait process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the previous game (start of the previous unit game), and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the predetermined time has elapsed. It will be in a waiting state until it does. The predetermined time in the wait process, that is, the wait time is set to 4.1 seconds from the start of the previous unit game, for example.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel rotation start process shown in FIG. 115 to rotate all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (S18). This reel rotation start process is executed by the interrupt process (reel control process) shown in FIG. This interrupt process is a process executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 ms).

  By this interruption process, the driving of the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is controlled, and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is started. Thereafter, the driving of the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is controlled by this interruption process, and the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are accelerated until the rotation reaches a constant speed (so-called normal acceleration process).

  Further, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R reaches a constant speed, this interruption process controls the driving of the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate at a constant speed. To be maintained.

  In the reel rotation start process, a reel effect (lock effect) such as a reel lock effect, which will be described later, can also be performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates reel rotation start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated reel rotation start command data in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 ( S19).

  By receiving this reel rotation start command data, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize the start of reel rotation, and can determine the timing for executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a pull-in priority storage process shown in FIG. 116 (S20). In this pull-in priority storage process, the pull-in priority table selection process shown in FIG. 117 is executed to determine the pull-in priority of all symbols on the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R. That is, in the pull-in priority storage process, stop information is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area for each symbol position of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R that is rotating based on the internal winning combination.

  For example, for each symbol of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, when the corresponding symbol is permitted to stop, the drawing priority data is stored in the drawing priority data storage area based on the drawing priority table, When stop is not permitted (for example, when a winning combination is won), data indicating prohibition of stop is stored in the draw priority data storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel stop control process shown in FIG. 119 (S21). By this process, the stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a winning search process (S22). In this winning search process, after all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped, the symbol combination displayed on the winning line and the symbol combination table are collated to determine the symbol combination displayed on the winning line. The

  Specifically, the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 31) and the data in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 18 to 21) are collated, and the collation result is displayed in the display combination storage area (FIG. 30). Stored).

  More specifically, the data in the symbol code storage area is copied as it is as the data in the display combination storage area. At that time, the payout number is obtained by referring to the symbol combination table. The combination of symbols displayed on the reel display window 4 is specified by stopping all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by the winning search process.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes payout of the number of medals according to the displayed symbol combination based on the result of the winning search process (S23). Along with this medal payout process, control of a hopper drive circuit (not shown) and update of the credit number are performed based on the payout number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates winning action command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated winning action command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 (S24). . The winning operation command data represents, for example, the type of display combination, a flag related to locking, etc., the number of medals to be paid out, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus end check process shown in FIG. 121 (S25). By this bonus end check process, a process for ending the operation of the MB gaming state is executed when a condition for ending the MB gaming state is satisfied.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus operation check process shown in FIG. 122 (S26). By this bonus operation check processing, processing for operating the MB gaming state based on the combination of symbols displayed by the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is executed.

  After executing the process of step S26, the main CPU 93 executes the process of step S11. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 executes a pseudo bonus executed when the effect gaming state transitions from the effect gaming state 1 to the effect gaming state 3 between the bonus end check process and the bonus operation check process. Perform a start lock. Here, the pseudo-bonus start lock is a game lock effect that is executed in the effect game state 1 when the normal replay is internally won and the first stop operation is performed except for the left stop button 19L.

<Power-on processing>
FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the power-on process executed in step S10 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether backup is normal (S40). In this determination process, it is determined whether the backup is normal or not by error detection using the checksum value.

  For example, the main CPU 93 stores the set value of the pachislot machine 1 and the checksum value calculated from the set value when the power is turned off in the main RAM 95 as backup data, and the determination process when the power is turned on (S40). , The set value and the checksum value stored in the main RAM 95 are read out.

  Then, the main CPU 93 compares the checksum value calculated from the read setting value and the like with the checksum value that has been backed up, and determines that the backup is normal if the comparison results match.

  When determining that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the backed up setting values and the like (S41). As a result, when the backup is normal, the set value before the power is turned off is set.

  After executing the process of step S41 or when determining in step S40 that the backup is not normal (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the setting change switch provided in the cabinet 2a of the pachislot machine 1 is on. It is determined whether or not (S42).

  Here, if it is determined that the setting change switch is ON (YES), the main CPU 93 executes initialization processing at the time of setting change (S43).

  In the initialization process at the time of changing the setting, for example, the data stored in the internal winning combination storing area and the display winning combination storing area of the main RAM 95 are cleared and the set value is cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated initialization command data in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 (S44). . The initialization command data represents, for example, whether or not a set value has been changed, a set value, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a setting value changing process (S45). In this setting value changing process, the setting value is selected from 1 to 6 according to the operation result of the reset switch, and when the reset switch is operated subsequently, the selected setting value is confirmed. . As described above, the main CPU 93 that changes the set value indicating the degree of advantage for the player constitutes an installation changing unit.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the setting change switch is in the on state (S46), and repeatedly executes the process of step S46 until a determination result that is not in the on state is obtained.

  Here, when a determination result that the setting change switch is not in the ON state is obtained (NO), the main CPU 93 generates and generates initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101. The initialization command data is stored in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 (S47), and the power-on process is terminated.

  In step S42, when determining that the setting change switch is not on (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the backup is normal (S48).

  Here, if it is determined that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 93 restores the state of the pachislot machine 1 to the state before the power is cut off based on the backup data stored in the main RAM 95 ( S49), the power-on process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S48 that the backup is not normal (NO), the main CPU 93 executes power-on error processing (S50). In power-on error processing, the main CPU 93 displays an error display or the like indicating that the backup is not normal.

  The main CPU 93 does not cancel the error state by operating the stop release switch or the reset switch in the state where the backup is not normal (backup error), and when the setting is newly changed Only the error state is canceled.

<Medal reception / start check processing>
FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the medal acceptance / start check process executed in step S12 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is an automatic insertion request (S60). When a replay role is won in the previous unit game, medals are automatically inserted in the current unit game. That is, in the determination process in step S60, it may be determined whether or not a replay combination has been won in the previous unit game.

  In step S60, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is an automatic insertion request (YES), the main CPU 93 executes an automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game (S61). Specifically, the main CPU 93 copies the automatic insertion counter to the insertion number counter and clears the automatic insertion counter.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of credited medals is the maximum value (S62). Specifically, the main CPU 93 checks whether the value of the credit counter is “50”.

  When the main CPU 93 determines in step S60 that there is no automatic insertion request (NO), or in step S62, the main CPU 93 determines that the number of credited medals is not the maximum value (NO). Is accepted (S63). For example, the main CPU 93 drives a solenoid of a selector (not shown) to form a path so that a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 passes through the selector. With this process, it is possible to add medals at the time of replay winning (credit).

  After the process of step S63 is executed, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum number of inserted sheets according to the gaming state (S64). In the present embodiment, three are set when the main gaming state is a gaming state other than the MB gaming state, and two are set when the MB gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not acceptance of medals is permitted (S65).

  If it is determined that the acceptance of medals is permitted (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the settlement switch 78 is turned on (S66). If it is determined that the settlement switch 78 is turned on (YES), the main CPU 93 executes a predetermined settlement process such as paying out credited medals (S67). For example, the main CPU 93 forms a path for discharging the credited medal from the medal payout opening 32.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the settlement switch 78 is not turned on (NO), the main CPU 93 executes medal insertion check processing for checking the number of inserted medals (S68). In this medal insertion check process, the value of the insertion number counter is updated according to the number of checked medals.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 executes medal insertion command transmission processing (S69), and generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101. Then, the generated medal insertion command data is stored in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95. The medal insertion command data represents, for example, the presence / absence of medal insertion, the value of the inserted number counter, the value of the credit counter, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of inserted medals is a game start possible number and determines whether or not the number of credited medals is a maximum value (S70). In the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 checks that the number of inserted games is 3 when the main gaming state is the non-MB gaming state, 2 when the main gaming state is the MB gaming state, and the credit is 50.

  If it is determined in step S70 that the number of inserted medals is the game start possible number and the number of credits is the maximum value (YES), the main CPU 93 prohibits acceptance of medals (S71). For example, the main CPU 93 forms a path for allowing the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 to be discharged from the medal payout slot 32 without driving the solenoid of the selector.

  After executing the processing in step S71, or in step S70, if it is determined that the number of inserted medals is the number that can start the game and the number of credits is not the maximum value (NO), the main CPU 93 Then, it is determined whether or not the number of inserted medals is the number that can start the game (S72).

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not the number of inserted medals is 3 when the main gaming state is the non-MB gaming state and 2 when the main gaming state is the MB gaming state. That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of medals inserted is a number that can start a unit game according to the gaming state.

  If it is determined in step S72 that the number of inserted medals is the number that can start the unit game (YES), or if it is determined in step S65 that acceptance of medals is not permitted (NO), or in step S62. When determining that the number of credits is the maximum value (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is on (S73).

  Here, when it is determined that the start switch 79 is not turned on (NO), or when it is determined in step S72 that the number of inserted medals is not the number that can start the unit game (NO), or the processing of step S67 is executed. After that, the main CPU 93 executes the process of step S65.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the start switch 79 is on (YES), the main CPU 93 clears the automatic input request (S74).

  After the process of step S74 is executed, the main CPU 93 prohibits the reception of medals (S75) and ends the medal reception / start check process.

<Internal lottery processing>
FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the internal lottery process executed in step S14 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the main gaming state is the MB gaming state (S80). This determination process is executed based on whether or not bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area corresponding to the MB gaming state is “1” with reference to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 35).

  That is, when bit 0 of the game state flag storage area is “1”, it is determined that the main game state is the MB game state, and when bit 0 of the game state flag storage area is “0”. It is determined that the main gaming state is not the MB gaming state.

  Here, when the main CPU 93 determines that the main gaming state is the MB gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the MB operating process (S81). In the MB operating process, the bits corresponding to all the small combinations in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 30) are updated to “1”. When the process during MB operation is executed, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process.

  On the other hand, when determining in step S80 that the main gaming state is not the MB gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table corresponding to the main gaming state (S82).

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 sets the internal lottery table for general gaming state (see FIG. 22) when the main gaming state is the general gaming state, and when the main gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. Sets the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table (see FIG. 23).

  Next, the main CPU 93 obtains the random value 1 stored in the random value storage area (S83).

  Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the predetermined area of the internal lottery table set in step S82, and the lottery value associated with each winning number (1 to 51 in the present embodiment) of the corresponding setting value. Are obtained one by one, and the lottery value is subtracted from the random value 1 (S84). That is, the main CPU 93 collates the internal winning combination.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the subtraction result obtained in step S84 is smaller than 0 (S85). Here, if the main CPU 93 determines that the subtraction result is not smaller than 0 (NO), that is, if it is determined that so-called borrowing is not performed, the main CPU 93 updates the random number 1 and the winning number (S86). ).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all winning numbers in the internal lottery table being used have been checked (S87). If it is determined that all winning numbers have not been checked (NO) Then, the process of step S84 is executed.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 93 determines that all winning numbers have been checked (YES), it sets 0 as the value of the data pointer (S88).

  In the present embodiment, the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table is set so that the subtraction result does not necessarily become 0 or more when the main CPU 93 finishes checking all winning numbers. Never executed.

  In step S85, if the main CPU 93 determines that the subtraction result is smaller than 0 (YES), that is, if it is determined that so-called borrowing has been performed, the winning number is referred to the set internal lottery table. The value of the data pointer for the small part / replay and the value of the data pointer for the bonus are obtained from (S89).

  After executing the processing of step S88 or step S89, the main CPU 93 refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 12) and determines the internal winning combination based on the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer. A combination is acquired (S90).

  In the process of step S90, the internal winning combination determining table corresponding to the value of the small combination / replay data pointer acquired in the process of step S88 or step S89 is referred to the internal winning combination determination table for small combination / replay. The value is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the internal winning combination acquired in step S90 in the internal winning combination storing area (see FIG. 29) (S91). In the process of step S91, the data value indicating the internal winning combination determined in the process of step S90 is stored in the internal winning combination storing area (storage areas 0 to 6).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 34) is 0 (S92). In this embodiment, in this determination process, it is determined whether or not “F_MB” is carried over.

  In step S92, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the carryover combination storage area is 0 (YES), it refers to the bonus internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 13) and determines the value of the bonus data pointer. An internal winning combination is acquired based on (S93).

  In the process of step S93, the bonus internal winning combination determination table is referred to, and the data value indicating the internal winning combination corresponding to the value of the bonus data pointer acquired in the process of step S88 or step S89 is determined.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 stores the internal winning combination acquired in step S93 in the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 34) (S94). In the process of step S94, when “F_MB” is acquired as the internal winning combination in step S93, bit 0 corresponding to “F_MB” of the carryover storage area is set to “1”.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 34) is 0 (S95). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not bit 0 corresponding to “F_MB” in the carryover storage area is set to “1” in step S94.

  If it is determined in step S95 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 sets bit 2 corresponding to “RT1 gaming state” in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 35) to “ 1 ”(S96). By the process of step S96, the main gaming state becomes the RT1 gaming state.

  If it is determined in step S92 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is not 0 (NO), if it is determined in step S95 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is 0 (YES), or the process of step S96 is executed. After that, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (S97).

  In the process of step S97, the data value of the internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 29) is updated based on the type of the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (see FIG. 34). After executing the process of step S97, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process.

<Reel stop initial setting process>
FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the reel stop initial setting process executed in step S15 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the main gaming state is the MB gaming state (S120). Here, if it is determined that the main gaming state is not the MB gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 is the same as the small role / replay data pointer acquired in step S89 of the internal lottery processing shown in FIG. Is set as the rotation stop number (S121).

  In the process of step S120, when it is determined that the main game state is the MB game state (YES), or after executing the process of step S121, the main CPU 93 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 26). Each information is acquired based on the rotation stop number (S122).

  In the process of step S122, the main CPU 93, for example, the number of the stop table used at the time of the first to third stop operations and the information necessary for performing the control change in the control change process (that is, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R). Are stopped in a specific order, and when stopped or pressed at a specific position, information used to reselect the stop table is acquired.

  The stop table stores information on the number of sliding pieces for the pressed position, either directly or indirectly. Using this information, there is a limit that does not cause a disadvantage to the player and does not cause erroneous winnings. Are configured to stop at a stop position intended by the developer.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier in each storage area of the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 31) (S123), stores 3 in the stop button non-operating counter (S124), and sets the reel stop initial setting. The process ends.

<Reel rotation start processing>
FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the reel rotation start process executed in step S18 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a reel lock effect is set (S130). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines, for example, whether or not a bit (flag) corresponding to the reel lock effect in the spinning effect flag storage area is set.

  If it is determined in step S130 that the reel lock effect is set (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the spinning effect based on the set reel lock effect (S131).

  Here, the main CPU 93 that executes the reel lock effect when a predetermined spinning effect condition is established constitutes a reel effect means.

  After executing the process of step S131, the main CPU 93 executes a random acceleration process (S132). In this process, the main CPU 93 randomly determines the time at which the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start to rotate, and starts rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R based on the determined time.

  Next, the main CPU 93 clears each flag in the used rotation effect flag storage area (S133), and ends the reel rotation start process.

  If it is determined in step S130 that the reel lock effect flag is not set in the spinning effect flag storage area (NO), the main CPU 93 executes normal acceleration processing (S134), and the reels The rotation start process ends.

  In this process, the main CPU 93 executes a normal acceleration process for simultaneously starting the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

<Retrieve priority storage process>
FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the pull-in priority storage process executed in step S20 of the main control process shown in FIG. 110 and step S224 of the reel stop control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 stores the value of the stop button inoperative counter in the main RAM 95 as the number of searches (S170).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a search target reel determination process for determining a search target reel (S171). In this process, among the rotating reels, for example, one reel on the left side is determined as a search target reel.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a pull-in priority table selection process shown in FIG. 117 (S172). In this pull-in priority table selection process, one pull-in priority table number is selected from the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 28).

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets 21 (the number of symbols on each reel) to the number of symbol checks stored in the main RAM 95, and sets 0 to the search symbol position (S173).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a symbol code storing process shown in FIG. 118 (S174). In the symbol code storage process, a symbol code of the symbol position data for checking for checking the symbol position of the rotating reel is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the display combination storing area (see FIG. 30) based on the acquired symbol code and the symbol code storing area (see FIG. 31) (S175).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a pull-in priority data acquisition process (S176). In this pull-in priority data acquisition process, in step S172, for the combination in which the corresponding bit is 1 in the display combination storing area and the corresponding bit is 1 in the internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 29). With reference to the information of the selected pull-in priority table number, pull-in priority data is acquired.

  In the drawing priority order data acquisition process, “stop prohibition” (000H) is set for the symbol positions that are erroneously won when stopped, and no internal winnings are made. For the symbol position, “stop possible” (00EH) is set.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired drawing priority data in a drawing priority data storage area corresponding to the search target reel (S177).

  Next, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the number of symbol checks, and adds 1 to the retrieved symbol position (S178).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is 0 (S179). Here, when it is determined that the number of symbol checks is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the process of step S174.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of symbol checks is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a search for the number of searches has been performed (S180). If it is determined that the search for the number of times of search has been executed (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the pull-in priority storage process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the search for the number of times of search is not executed (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the process of step S171.

<Pull-in priority table selection processing>
FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a pull-in priority table selection process executed in step S172 of the pull-in priority storage process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pull-in priority table selection data is set (S190). If it is determined that the pull-in priority table selection data is set (YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 33) and the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 32). Then, the drawing priority table number corresponding to the drawing priority table selection data is set from the drawing priority table selection table (see FIG. 27) (S191), and the drawing priority table selection process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the pull-in priority table selection data is not set (NO), the main CPU 93 sets a pull-in priority table corresponding to the pull-in priority table number (S192), and the pull-in priority table The selection process ends.

<Design code storage processing>
118 is a flowchart showing the symbol code storage process executed in step S174 of the drawing priority order storage process shown in FIG. 116 and step S220 of the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 119.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets valid line data (S200). In the present embodiment, one effective line (medium-medium-medium) is set.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the symbol position data for checking the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S201). In the present embodiment, for example, in the case of the left reel 3L, the middle symbol position is set as the symbol position data for checking.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the symbol code of the symbol position data for check (S202), and ends the symbol code storage process.

<Reel stop control process>
FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the reel stop control process executed in step S21 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S210). This process is a process for determining whether or not a signal is output from the stop switch of the stop switch substrate 80. When the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has not been pressed (NO), the main CPU 93 repeatedly executes the process of step S210.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (YES), the depression order storage area (see FIG. 33) and the operation stop button storage area (FIG. 32) according to the pressed stop button. Reference) is updated (S211).

  Here, the main CPU 93 stores the types of operation stop buttons corresponding to the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation in the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 33), and the pressing order storage area. , It is possible to determine the pressing order of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S212), determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (S213), and stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (S213). S214). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the corresponding reel when a stop operation is detected by the stop switches 80L, 80C, 80R.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a sliding piece number determination process (S215). This sliding piece number determining process is a process of determining the number of sliding pieces defined at the stop start position according to the stop table selection data group selected based on the internal winning combination from the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 26). It is.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes the priority pull-in control process shown in FIG. 120 (S216). This priority pull-in control processing is performed so that the drawing priority data of the number of sliding symbols acquired in step S215 stops at the symbol position corresponding to higher drawing priority data within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols. This is a process of correcting the number.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated reel stop command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 (S217). . The reel stop command data represents the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces determination data (or the planned stop position), and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines the scheduled stop position of the search target reel based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determination data, and stores it in the main RAM 95 (S218). The scheduled stop position is a symbol position obtained by adding any one of predetermined numerical values “0” to “4” defined as the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and the symbol position where the reel rotation stops. It is.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the planned stop position as a search symbol position (S219).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a symbol code storage process (see FIG. 118) (S220). Here, the bit of the combination (design combination) that can be displayed is updated to 1, and the bit of the combination (design combination) that is not displayed is updated to 0.

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area from the symbol code acquired in the symbol code storage process (S221).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs control change processing (S222). In this control change process, the reel stop information group is updated when a specific stop position is reached.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S223). Here, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 116) (S224), and executes the process of step S210.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control process.

<Priority pull-in control processing>
FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the priority pull-in control process executed in step S216 of the reel stop control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets a pull-in priority data storage area corresponding to the operation stop button (S230).

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the stop start position stored in the main RAM 95 (S231).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB gaming state is in operation (S232). In this determination process, when bit 0 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 35) is “1”, it is determined that the MB gaming state is operating, and when it is “0”, MB It is determined that the gaming state is not active.

  If it is determined that the MB gaming state is in operation (YES), the main CPU 93 determines that the search target reel determined in step S213 of the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 119 is the left reel 3L. It is determined whether or not (S233).

  If it is determined in step S232 that the MB gaming state is not in operation (NO), or if it is determined in step S233 that the search target reel is not the left reel 3L (NO), the main CPU 93 performs the reel stop control process. The priority order table (see FIG. 24) corresponding to the sliding piece number determination data determined in step S215 is set (S234).

  For example, if the number of sliding symbols determined by the stop table (stop data table) is 4, the number of sliding symbols determination data in the priority order table is set in the 4th row (address).

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets 5 as the initial value of the priority order and the number of checks (S235). That is, it is determined to search five times from 0 to 4 frames.

  If it is determined in step S233 that the search target reel is the left reel 3L (YES), the main CPU 93 sets an MB gaming state priority order table (see FIG. 25) according to the number of sliding piece determination data. (S236).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets 3 as the initial value of the priority order and sets 2 as the number of checks (S237).

  After executing the processing of step S235 or step S237, the main CPU 93 sets the sliding piece number determination data as the number of sliding pieces (S238).

  Next, the main CPU 93 extracts a stop search position based on the stop start position and the priority order (S239).

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires pull-in priority order data of the stop search position (S240).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pull-in priority data acquired in the process of step S240 is equal to or higher than the pull-in priority data acquired previously (S241).

  If it is determined that the pull-in priority data acquired in the process of step S241 is greater than or equal to the pull-in priority data acquired previously (YES), the main CPU 93 updates the number of sliding frames (S242). .

  In step S241, when it is determined that the pull-in priority data acquired in the process in step S240 is not equal to or higher than the pull-in priority data acquired previously (NO), or after executing the process in step S242, the main CPU 93 performs priority. 1 is subtracted from each of the order and the number of checks (S243).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of checks is 0 (S244). If it is determined that the number of checks is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the number of sliding frames (S245) and ends the priority pull-in control process.

  On the other hand, when determining that the number of checks is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the process of step S239.

<Bonus end check process>
FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the bonus end check process executed in step S25 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB is operating (S280). In this process, when bit 0 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 35) is “1”, it is determined that the MB is operating, and when bit 0 of the game state flag storage area is “0”. It is determined that the MB is not operating.

  If it is determined that the MB is not operating (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the MB is operating (YES), the main CPU 93 executes CB termination processing (S281). In this CB end processing, bit 1 of the game state flag storage area is reset to “0”. That is, during the MB operation, the operation and the end of the CB are repeated until the medal payout reaches the bonus end number.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 updates the bonus end number counter indicating the remaining payout number (S282), and determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than 0 (S283).

  If it is determined that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 performs MB end processing (S284). In the MB end process, bit 0 of the game state flag storage area is reset to “0”.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus end command transmission process (S285), and ends the bonus end check process. In this process, the main CPU 93 generates bonus end command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated bonus end command data in a communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. Here, the bonus end command data represents, for example, that the bonus has ended.

<Bonus activation check process>
FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the bonus operation check process executed in step S26 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB is operating (S290). In this process, when bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area is “1”, it is determined that the MB is operating, and when bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area is “0”, MB is determined. Judged not working.

  If it is determined that the MB is in operation (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the CB operation process (S291) and ends the bonus operation check process. In the CB operation process, bit 1 of the game state flag storage area is set to “1”.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the MB is not operating (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB has won (S292).

  If it is determined that the MB has won (YES), the main CPU 93 executes MB operation processing (S293). In the MB operation process, bit 0 of the game state flag storage area is set to “1”, 30 is set to the bonus end number counter, and bit 1 of the game state flag storage area is set to “1”.

  Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area (S294), executes a bonus start command transmission process (S295), and ends the bonus operation check process. In this processing, the main CPU 93 generates bonus start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated bonus start command data in a communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95.

  If it is determined in step S292 that the MB has not won (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a replay is displayed (S296).

  If it is determined that no replay is displayed (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that replay is displayed (YES), the main CPU 93 makes an automatic insertion request for copying the value of the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion number counter (S297), and ends the bonus operation check process.

<Interrupt processing under main CPU control>
FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 93. This process is executed every 1.1172 milliseconds.

  First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S300).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes an input port check process shown in FIG. 124 (S301). In this process, the main CPU 93 confirms the presence / absence of a signal transmitted to the sub control circuit 101.

  For example, the main CPU 93 stores input state command data representing on-edge and off-edge information of various switches including on-edge and off-edge of the start switch 79, stop switches 80L, 80C, 80R, etc. in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95. Store.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes timer update processing (S302).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes an effect timer update process (S303).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel control process for controlling the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (S304). More specifically, the main CPU 93 starts the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in response to a request for starting the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, that is, in response to the start operation. Control is performed so that 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate. Further, the main CPU 93 performs control so that the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R corresponding to the stop operation stops in response to the stop operation.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a lamp and 7-segment driving process (S305). For example, the main CPU 93 displays the number of credited medals, the number of payouts, etc. on various display units.

  Next, the main CPU 93 restores the register (S306), and terminates the interrupt process that occurs periodically.

<Input port check processing>
FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the input port check process executed in step S301 of the interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 93.

  First, the main CPU 93 checks the state of each input port (S310).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the state of the previous interrupt, that is, the input port before one interrupt in the main RAM 95 (S311), and stores the current state of the input port in the main RAM 95 (S312).

  As described above, the main CPU 93 can check the states of both input ports by comparing the state of the input port before one interrupt with the current state of the input port. Thus, it is checked whether the state of the input port has changed, for example, whether or not the BET button 22 has been pressed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the on-edge state in the main RAM 95 (S313). In the present embodiment, the on-edge refers to a state where the button is pressed, and the off-edge refers to a state where the button is released.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates input state command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated input state command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 (S314). The input port check process is terminated.

[Sub-control processing]
The sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 executes various processes according to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 125 to 156.

<Power-on processing>
FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing power-on processing of the sub CPU 102 at power-on.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process (S320). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs error check of the sub RAM 103 and the like, and initializes the task system. The task system includes a lamp control task, a sound control task, which are task groups for timer interrupt synchronization, and a mother task shown in FIG. 128, which is a task group for VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization) interrupt synchronization.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the lamp control task shown in FIG. 126 (S321). The lamp control task waits for the sub CPU 102 to receive a timer interrupt event message transmitted to the sub CPU 102 every 2 milliseconds, and in response to receiving the timer interrupt event message, It is a process which performs the process which controls a lighting state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the sound control task shown in FIG. 127 (S322). In the sound control task, the sub CPU 102 controls the sound output state from the speakers 58, 64, 65L, and 65R.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the mother task (S323) and aborts the power-on process. The mother task is a task group for VSYNC (vertical synchronization signal) interrupt synchronization, and a vertical synchronization signal (VSYNC interrupt signal) sent from the liquid crystal display device 11 when an image of one frame is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Is used.

<Ramp control task>
FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the lamp control task activated in step S321 of the power-on process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes a timer interrupt initialization process (S330). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes initialization processing of lamp related data (S331).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 waits for a timer interrupt (S332). In this process, until the sub CPU 102 receives a timer interrupt event message every 2 milliseconds, the sub CPU 102 executes a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization.

  As a task group different from timer interrupt synchronization, for example, a main board communication task which is a task group for command reception interrupt synchronization can be cited. Moreover, a task group (not shown) for power supply interrupt synchronization, a task group (not shown) for door monitoring unit communication synchronization, and the like can be given.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the sound control task shown in FIG. 127 (S333). In this process, the task in the next priority of the timer interrupt synchronization task group which is the same group as the lamp control task is executed.

  In this embodiment, the priority order of the task group for timer interrupt synchronization is basically the order of the lamp control task and the sound control task. Therefore, in step S333, the sound control task at the next priority of the lamp control task is executed. In step S333, among the sound control tasks shown in FIG. 127, the processes in steps S342 and S343 are executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a lamp data analysis process (S334), executes a lamp effect execution process (S335), and executes the process of step S332.

<Sound control task>
FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the sound control task activated in step S322 of the power-on process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process of sound related data related to the sound output state from the speakers 58, 64, 65L, and 65R (S340). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a task in the next priority of the task group for timer interrupt synchronization that is the same group as the sound control task, that is, the lamp control task (S341).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes sound data analysis processing (S342), performs sound effect execution processing (S343), and executes processing in step S341.

<Mother task>
FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the mother task activated in step S323 of the power-on process shown in FIG.

  In the mother task, the sub CPU 102 activates the main task (S350), activates the main board communication task (S351), and activates the animation task (S352).

<Main task>
FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the main task activated in step S350 of the mother task shown in FIG.

  In the main task, the sub CPU 102 executes a VSYNC interrupt initialization process (S360), and waits for a VSYNC interrupt (S361). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a drawing process (S362), and executes the process of step S361.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the main board communication task activated in step S351 of the mother task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes initialization of the communication message queue (S370), and executes a reception command check (S371).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a command different from the previous one has been received (S372). If it is determined that a command different from the previous command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the process of step S371.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a command different from the previous command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the received command is a legitimate command, creates game information from the received command, and creates it. The game information is stored in the sub RAM 103 (S373). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a command analysis process shown in FIG. 131 (S374), and executes the process of step S371.

<Command analysis processing>
FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed in step S374 of the main board communication task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an effect content determination process shown in FIG. 133 (S380), executes a ramp data determination process (S381), executes a sound data determination process (S382), and registers each determined data. In step S383, the command analysis process is terminated.

<Anime task>
FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the animation task activated in step S352 of the mother task shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 checks a change from the previous game information (S390). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 indicates that the current game information updated by the interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 93 shown in FIG. 123 is the game information registered in the sub RAM 103 in the previous interrupt process. Check if the game information is different.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes object control processing (S391). Specifically, when a check result indicating that the game information has changed is obtained in step S390, the sub CPU 102 controls the image according to the change in the game information.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes animation task management processing (S392). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 manages the order of images displayed in various effects. When executing the animation task management process, the sub CPU 102 executes the process of step S390.

<Production content determination process>
FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the effect content determination process executed in step S380 of the command analysis process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an initialization command has been received (S400). If it is determined that the initialization command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the initialization command reception process (S401), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process at the time of receiving the initialization command, for example, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the initialization command and the normal mode reference table at the time of setting change (see FIG. 38) are referenced based on the reception of the initialization command. The table is set.

  On the other hand, when determining that the initialization command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a medal insertion command has been received (S402). If it is determined that a medal insertion command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a medal insertion command reception process (S403), and ends the effect content determination process. In the medal insertion command reception process, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a medal insertion command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a medal insertion command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether a start command has been received (S404). If it is determined that a start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a start command reception process shown in FIG. 134 (S405), and ends the effect content determination process. In the start command receiving process, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a start command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether a reel rotation start command has been received (S406). If it is determined that a reel rotation start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a reel rotation start command reception process (S407), and ends the effect content determination process. In the reel rotation start command reception process, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a reel rotation start command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a reel stop command has been received (S408). If it is determined that a reel stop command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a reel stop command reception process (S409), and ends the effect content determination process. In the reel stop command reception process, for example, the type of the stop reel, the stop start position, the number of sliding frames, or the scheduled stop position is transmitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a winning operation command has been received (S410). If it is determined that a winning action command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a winning action command reception process (S411), and ends the effect content determination process. In the winning operation command reception process, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a winning operation command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a bonus start command has been received (S412). If it is determined that a bonus start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a bonus start command reception process (S413), and ends the effect content determination process. In the bonus start command reception process, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a bonus start command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a bonus start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether a bonus end command has been received (S414). If it is determined that a bonus end command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a bonus end command reception process (S415), and ends the effect content determination process. In the bonus end command reception process, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as a bonus end command is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether an input state command has been received (S416). If it is determined that an input state command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes an input state command reception process (S417), and ends the effect content determination process.

In the input state command reception process, for example, the main CPU 93 transmits as an input state command whether each operation unit is in an on-edge state or an off-edge state. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S416 that the input state command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process.
O) The sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process.

<Processing when receiving a start command>
FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the start command reception time process executed in step S405 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG. In the following description, setting the state (flag, value) in the storage area (counter) means that the bit corresponding to the state (flag) set in the storage area is set to “1” (ON) (Flag, value) is stored.

  First, the sub CPU 102 extracts an effect random number value and stores the extracted effect random number value in the effect random number storage area of the sub RAM 103 (S420). Next, the sub CPU 102 stores an AT winning information storage area, a pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning flag storage area, a pseudo bonus ART lottery winning flag storage area, a pseudo bonus medium bonus bonus winning state lottery winning flag storage area, Each winning storage area is initialized (S421). Here, the flag stored in each winning storage area is set when winning is performed by a predetermined lottery executed in each control process by the sub CPU 102 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub gaming state set in the sub gaming state storage area is the normal gaming state (S422). In this process, it is determined that the normal gaming state is set. If the answer is YES (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the normal middle processing (S423), and ends the start command reception processing. Here, in the normal process, the sub CPU 102 displays the process related to the transition of the gaming state, such as the normal time pseudo bonus type lottery process (see step S442) and the normal time precursor game number lottery process (see step S457), and the probability state. A normal high-accuracy transition game number lottery process to be determined (see step S460) is executed.

  If it is determined in step S422 that the normal gaming state is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the first AT state is set in the secondary gaming state storage area (step S422). S424). In this process, if it is determined that the first AT state is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the process during the first AT state (S425), and ends the start command reception process. . Here, in the process during the first AT state, the sub CPU 102 executes the first AT state in which the eight-bell role push order navigation is executed during the first AT state game number.

  If it is determined in step S424 that the first AT state is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the second AT state is set in the sub gaming state storage area. (S426). In this process, if it is determined that the second AT state is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the second AT state process (S427) and ends the start command reception process. . Here, in the process during the second AT state, the sub CPU 102 performs the push-order navigation of the eight-bell role during the second number of AT state games, and produces different effects depending on the selected AT continuation type. Execute the second AT state to execute.

  If it is determined in step S426 that the second AT state is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state is set in the sub gaming state storage area. (S428). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state process (S429), and ends the start command receiving process. Here, in the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning pseudo bonus state is promoted to a pseudo bonus state that is more advantageous to the player.

  If it is determined in step S428 that the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus transition state is set in the sub gaming state storage area. (S430). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus transition state is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the pseudo bonus transition process (S431) and ends the start command reception process. Here, in the pseudo bonus transition process, the sub CPU 102 executes the lottery for transition to the special pseudo bonus state and the promotion lottery for the pseudo bonus state to be won until the pseudo bonus transition combination (described later) is won, and the pseudo bonus is executed. This is a gaming state in which a pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect is executed when a winning combination is won.

  If it is determined in step S430 that the pseudo bonus transition state is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus state is set in the sub gaming state storage area (S432). ). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus state is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the process during the pseudo bonus (S433), and ends the start command receiving process. Here, in the pseudo-bonus middle processing, the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo-bonus state in which a push order navigation is performed for winning the eight bell combinations a predetermined number of times. Further, in this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus state is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the start command reception process.

<Normal medium processing>
135 and 136 are flowcharts showing the normal processing executed in step S423 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S440). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won in the pseudo bonus type lottery executed in the previous normal middle processing.

  If it is determined in step S440 that the pseudo bonus type 0 is set (NO), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the pseudo bonus ceiling counter (S441). Here, the pseudo bonus ceiling counter is a counter that counts the number of unit games when the pseudo bonus state is not won, and when it becomes a predetermined value (for example, 600), In the bonus type lottery, the normal pseudo bonus lottery table (see FIG. 46D) that always wins any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is referred to.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a normal-time pseudo bonus type lottery process (S442). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines a normal pseudo bonus lottery table (see FIGS. 46A to 46D) to be referred to based on the currently selected probability state and the value of the pseudo bonus ceiling counter. A pseudo bonus type lottery process is executed with reference to the determined normal pseudo bonus lottery table.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the pseudo bonus type lottery executed in step S442 in the pseudo bonus type stock table (S443). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S444). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won in the normal pseudo bonus type lottery executed in step S442.

  If it is determined in the process of step S444 that any one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus ceiling counter (S445). In this process, the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus ceiling counter because the pseudo bonus state is won in the normal pseudo bonus type lottery executed in step S442.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery process (S446). In this process, the sub-CPU 102 is based on the normal mode and the probability state determined by referring to the normal mode reference table (see FIG. 39) based on the currently set AT state non-winning count and the selected table. , Determining a reference normal lottery bonus lottery table (see (a) to (c) of FIGS. 52 to 54) to be referred to, and referring to the determined normal pseudo bonus bonus ART lottery table, Execute lottery processing.

  As shown in step S444 and step S446, when the pseudo bonus state is won, whether or not to execute the ART lottery process and shift to the AT state, the loop rate as the continuation probability of continuing the AT state, and the AT state The sub CPU 102 for determining the number of sets as the number of continuations for continuing the process constitutes a specific effect state transition lottery unit, a continuation probability determination unit, and a continuation number determination unit. Here, the sub CPU 102 is configured to execute an ART lottery when a pseudo bonus is won in each process described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 (S447). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the normal pseudo bonus winning ART lottery executed in step S 446 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART success / failure set in the ART success / failure storage area is an AT winning (S448). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the AT winning number associated with the AT winning is won in the normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery executed in step S446.

  If it is determined in step S448 that the AT is not winning (NO), the sub CPU 102 adds the first AT state game number during pseudo bonus and turns off the lottery permission flag (S449). Here, the first AT state game number extra lottery permission flag during the pseudo bonus determines whether or not the first AT state game number extra lottery is executed in the pseudo bonus mid-process (see FIGS. 141 and 142). It is a flag to do.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the AT state non-winning number counter (S450). In this processing, since the sub CPU 102 wins the normal pseudo bonus type lottery in step S442 and does not win the AT state in the normal pseudo bonus win lottery in step S446, the sub CPU 102 determines the AT state non-winning count. Add 1 to the AT state non-winning counter to be stored.

  Thus, the sub RAM 103 that stores the number of times that the AT state is not won in the ART lottery at the time of the pseudo bonus state winning in the AT state non-winning number counter constitutes a non-winning number storage means.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes normal mode number determination processing (S451), and sets a normal mode associated with the determined normal mode number (S452). In these processes, the sub CPU 102 refers to the normal mode reference table (see FIG. 39), and determines the normal mode number from the currently selected table and the value stored in the AT state non-winning number counter. The normal mode associated with the determined normal mode number is set in the normal mode storage area.

  Here, as described above, in the normal mode reference table, the AT state non-winning count is a specific number defined for each table (for example, 9 times for the table A and 4 times for the table W). In this case, the normal modes 4 and 5 are configured to be set in the normal mode storage area by the sub CPU 102.

  When the normal modes 4 and 5 are set, the sub CPU 102 determines the normal normal mode 4 and 5 selection pseudo bonus state winning ART lottery (not shown) in the normal pseudo bonus winning ART lottery processing of step S46. The ART lottery is executed with reference to the table. Here, the ART lottery table when the normal normal mode 4 or 5 is selected and the pseudo bonus state is won is a probability table in which lottery values are associated with each other so as to make sure that the ART win is the AT winning number that wins the AT state. is there.

  That is, the sub CPU 102 is configured to shift the sub game state to the AT state after the pseudo bonus state ends when the AT non-winning number is a specific number and the pseudo bonus state is won.

  Thereby, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment shifts the sub gaming state to the AT state when the ART lottery non-winning count is a specific number and the transition to the pseudo bonus state is determined. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a permanent increase in the loop rate and the number of sets, to suppress unnecessary loss on the game store side, and to allow the player to play while maintaining a moderate joy be able to.

  If it is determined in the process of step S448 that the game is an AT win (YES), the sub CPU 102 adds the first AT state game number during pseudo bonus and turns the lottery permission flag ON (S453). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a normal time flag as an AT state flag (S454). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 sets a normal time flag in the AT state flag storage area of the sub RAM 103.

  After executing the processing of step S452 and step S454 or in the processing of step S444, when determining that the pseudo bonus type 0 is set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the value set in the precursor counter is It is determined whether or not it is 0 (S455). Here, the precursor counter is a counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 103, and stores the number of precursor games.

  If it is determined in step S455 that the value set in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value set in the precursor counter (S456).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S455 that the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a normal-time precursor game number lottery process (S457). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to refer to the normal-time precursor game number lottery table (FIG. 94), and the normal time precursor game number lottery process for determining the number of precursor games is executed with reference to the determined normal time game number lottery table.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the normal sign game number lottery executed in step S457 in the sign counter (S458).

  After executing the processing of step S456 or step S458, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S459). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won in the normal pseudo bonus type lottery executed in step S442.

  If it is determined in the process of step S459 that the pseudo bonus type 0 is set (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes a highly-accurate transition game number lottery process (S460). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines a high-probability transition game number lottery table to be referenced (see (a) to (d) in FIGS. 42 to 44) based on the currently set normal mode and probability state. Then, with reference to the determined high-precision transition game number lottery table, a high-precision transition game that determines the probability state and the number of games in each probability state when high probability or super-high probability is selected as the probability state. A number lottery process is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the values currently set in the high-accuracy counter and the ultra-high-accuracy counter (S461), and uses the result of the high-accuracy transition game number lottery executed in step S460 as a corresponding high-accuracy counter. And it sets to a super high-precision counter (S462). Here, the high-accuracy counter and the ultra-high-accuracy counter are counters stored in predetermined areas of the sub-RAM 103, respectively, and when the sub-CPU 102 selects high-accuracy and ultra-high accuracy as the probability state, the probability state The number of games to be executed in is stored. Further, by executing the process of step S462 after the execution of the process of step S461, the sub CPU 102 performs the high-accuracy counter and subtraction without subtracting the high-accuracy game number and the ultra-high-accuracy game number determined in the process of step S460. Can be set to an ultra-high accuracy counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal state in the sub gaming state storage area, and ends the normal process.

  If it is determined in step S459 that any one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the precursor counter is 0. Judgment is made (S464). In this process, when it is determined that the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the state transition common process at the end of the precursor shown in FIG. 139 (S465). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes a process of determining the sub game state of the next game when the precursor state is finished.

  After executing the process of step S465 or in the process of step S464, if it is determined that the value set in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the high accuracy counter and the ultra high accuracy counter. Initialization is performed (S466), and the normal medium processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in the process of step S440 that any one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the warning signal process (S467) and ends the normal process. . In this process, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to a precursor state where the promotion lottery is executed.

<Common processing after ART lottery>
FIG. 137 shows step S447 of the normal medium process shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, step S493 of the precursor process shown in FIG. 138, and steps S538, 143, and 144 of the pseudo bonus medium process shown in FIGS. 141 and 142. Step S565 of the pseudo-bonus end process shown in FIG. 1, Step S600 of the first AT state start process shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, Steps S639 and 149 of the first AT state process shown in FIGS. In step S679 of the second AT state process shown in FIG. 151, step S682, step S737 of the second AT state end process shown in FIG. 153, and step S762 of the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the common process after ART lottery performed.

  First, the sub CPU 102 sets ART success / failure in the ART success / failure storage area (S470). In this process, among the results of the ART lottery used as the trigger for execution of the common process after the ART lottery, information related to ART success / failure is set in the ART success / failure storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the loop rate at the end of the loop reference stock table (S471). In this process, the information related to the loop rate is set at the end of the loop reference stock table among the results of the ART lottery that has triggered execution of the common process after the ART lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the number of ART sets in the loop stock counter (S472). In this process, information related to the number of ART sets is stored in a loop stock counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 103 among the results of the ART lottery that triggered the execution of the common process after the ART lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the number of special mode 6 sets in the special mode 6 stock counter (S473), and ends the common processing after the ART lottery. In this process, among the results of the ART lottery that triggered the execution of the common process after the ART lottery, information related to the number of special mode 6 sets is stored in the special mode 6 stock counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. To do.

<Predictive treatment>
138 shows steps S467 of the normal medium processing shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, step S623 of the first AT state processing shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, and the second AT state shown in FIGS. 149 to 151. It is a flowchart which shows the warning process performed in step S707 of a process.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo bonus promotion lottery process (S480). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table (see FIG. 5) based on the sub gaming state set in the sub gaming state storage area and the pseudo bonus color type stored in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. 47, 48 (refer to (a) to (e)), refer to the determined pseudo bonus promotion lottery table, execute a pseudo bonus promotion lottery process, and store the result of the pseudo bonus promotion lottery in the sub RAM 103. The pseudo bonus promotion lottery result storage area stored in a predetermined area is set.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning is set in the pseudo bonus promotion lottery result storage area (S481). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the promotion lottery is won in the pseudo bonus promotion lottery executed in step S480.

  If it is determined in step S481 that the pseudo bonus promotion lottery is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type won by the promotion lottery in the pseudo bonus type stock table (S482). . In this process, since the sub CPU 102 has won the promotion lottery, the sub CPU 102 is currently winning by changing the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table to the pseudo bonus type won by the promotion lottery. The pseudo bonus type is promoted to the pseudo bonus type determined by the promotion lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table is the pseudo bonus type 5 (S483). In this process, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus type is not 5 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table is the pseudo bonus type 6. (S484).

  If it is determined in step S483 that the pseudo bonus type 5 is set (YES) or if it is determined in step S484 that the pseudo bonus type 6 is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 Turns on the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state flag (S485). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus promotion gaming state flag stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  After executing the process of step S485 or in the process of step S484, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type is not the pseudo bonus type 6 (NO), the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning flag ( S486). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning flag stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  After determining that the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning is not set after executing the processing of step S486 or in the processing of step S481 (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the pseudo bonus winning lottery processing during pseudo bonus winning. (S487). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes a lottery process for determining whether or not to win the pseudo bonus type 8 as the pseudo bonus type.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type 8 has been won in the pseudo bonus type bonus winning lottery executed in step S487 (S488). In this process, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 8 has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value stored in the precursor counter (S489).

  If it is determined in the process of step S488 that the bonus bonus type 8 has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the precursor counter (S490), and the pseudo bonus type 8 is added to the top of the pseudo bonus type stock table. Is set (S491). In this process, the sub CPU 102 can set the pseudo bonus type 8 in the pseudo bonus type stock table while stocking the winning pseudo bonus type.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes pseudo bonus ART lottery processing during pseudo bonus winning (S492). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery process with reference to the pseudo bonus ART bonus lottery table (see FIG. 55).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 (S493). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the ART bonus lottery during the pseudo bonus winning executed in step S 492 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART success / failure set in the ART success / failure storage area is an AT winning (S494). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the AT winning number associated with the AT winning is won in the ART bonus winning lottery during the pseudo bonus winning executed in step S492.

  If it is determined in the process of step S494 that the AT is a win (YES), the sub CPU 102 adds the number of first AT state games during the pseudo bonus and turns on the lottery permission flag (S495).

  After executing the processing of step S489 and step S495, or in the processing of step S494, when determining that the AT is not winning (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value stored in the precursor counter is 0 or not. It is determined whether or not (S496). In this process, if it is determined that the value stored in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor process.

  If it is determined in the process of step S496 that the value stored in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the state transition common process at the end of the precursor shown in FIG. 139 (S497). Then, the precursory process is terminated.

<Common process for status transition at the end of precursory>
FIG. 139 is a step S465 of the normal middle process shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, a step S497 of the precursory process shown in FIG. 138, a step S655 of the first AT state process shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, and FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a state transition common process at the end of a precursor executed in step S700 of the second AT state process shown in FIG. 151.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table is the pseudo bonus type 8 (S500). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 8 is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus state in the sub gaming state storage area (S501), and the state transition common at the end of the sign is common. The process ends.

  Thus, when the pseudo bonus type 8 is set, the sub CPU 102 is configured to shift the sub game state directly from the precursor state to the pseudo bonus state without going through the pseudo bonus transition state.

  If it is determined in step S500 that the pseudo bonus type 8 is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state transition flag is ON (S502). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state transition flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state transition flag to OFF (S503), and the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state transition flag is simulated in the sub gaming state storage area. The bonus promotion game state is set (S504), and the state transition common process at the end of the precursor is ended.

  In this way, when the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state transition flag is set, that is, when it is determined to transition to the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state, the sub bonus gaming state is set to the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state after the precursor state ends. The sub CPU 102 that makes the transition constitutes a third specific performance state transition means.

  If it is determined in the process of step S502 that the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state transition flag is not ON (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus transition state in the sub gaming state storage area (S505), and the sign ends. End the common state transition process.

<Pseudo bonus transfer process>
FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus transition process executed in step S431 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an effect based on the pseudo bonus reference table (see FIG. 45) (S510). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes the pseudo bonus confirmation screen effect, refers to the pseudo bonus reference table, and executes the effect in the pseudo bonus state corresponding to the winning pseudo bonus type. For example, when the pseudo bonus type 1 is set in the pseudo bonus type stock table, the pseudo bonus reference table is referred to execute the effect of the red same color pseudo bonus state.

  Further, when the winning order bell is won, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table and the effect gaming state stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95. Push order in which a pseudo bonus confirmation screen navigation lottery table (see (a) to (e) in FIGS. 49 and 50) is determined, and the determined bonus bonus screen navigation lottery table is referenced to win the eight-bell role. Execute a lottery for navigation.

  For example, when the pseudo bonus type 1 is set and the effect gaming state 0 is stored in the main RAM 95, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo bonus confirmation screen navigation lottery table shown in FIG. A lottery of push order navigation for winning the sheet bell role is executed.

  Here, when the sub CPU 102 executes the push order navigation for winning the eight bell combination, the main CPU 93 shifts the effect gaming state to the effect gaming state 1 when the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus state. be able to.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the normal replay which is a pseudo bonus transition combination is won (S511). In this process, if it is determined that the normal replay is won (YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the effect game stored in the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table and a predetermined area of the main RAM 95. Based on the status, the pseudo bonus confirmation screen navigation lottery table to be referred to is determined, and the determined pseudo bonus determination screen navigation lottery table is referred to, the push order navigation lottery is executed. It is determined whether or not the navigation is a push order navigation that causes the first stop operation to be executed other than for the left stop button 19L (S512).

  If it is determined in the process of step S512 that the first stop operation has been won for the push order navigation to be executed by a button other than the left stop button 19L (YES), the sub CPU 102 stores the pseudo stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. The bonus shift flag is set to ON (S513).

  After executing the process of step S513, if it is determined that the winning combination is not a normal replay in the process of step S511 (NO) or in the process of step S512, the push order navigation that causes the left stop button 19L to execute the first stop operation If it is determined that is executed (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo bonus promotion lottery process (S514).

  In the processing of step S514, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table to be referenced based on the sub gaming state set in the sub gaming state storage area and the pseudo bonus color type stored in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. (Refer to (a) to (e) in FIGS. 47 and 48), refer to the determined pseudo bonus promotion lottery table, execute the pseudo bonus promotion lottery process, and substituting the result of the pseudo bonus promotion lottery The pseudo bonus promotion lottery result storage area stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 103 is set.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning is set in the pseudo bonus promotion lottery result storage area (S515). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the promotion lottery is won in the pseudo bonus promotion lottery executed in step S514.

  If it is determined in step S515 that the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type won by the promotion lottery in the pseudo bonus type stock table (S516). Then, the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning flag stored in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 is turned ON (S517).

  After determining whether the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning is not set after the processing of step S517 or in the processing of step S515 (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the pseudo bonus type lottery processing during the pseudo bonus winning. (S518). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes a lottery process for determining whether or not to win the pseudo bonus type 8 as the pseudo bonus type.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type 8 is won in the pseudo bonus winning lottery lottery executed in step S518 (S519). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 8 is not won (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo bonus transition process.

  If it is determined in step S519 that the bonus bonus type 8 has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type 8 at the end of the pseudo bonus type stock table (S520). In this process, the sub CPU 102 can set the pseudo bonus type 8 in the pseudo bonus type stock table while stocking the winning pseudo bonus type.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes pseudo bonus ART lottery processing during pseudo bonus winning (S521). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery process with reference to the pseudo bonus ART bonus lottery table (see FIG. 55).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 (S522). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the ART bonus lottery during pseudo bonus winning executed in step S 521 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 turns on the first AT state game number addition lottery permission flag during the pseudo bonus (S523), sets the pseudo bonus state in the sub game state storage area (S524), and ends the pseudo bonus transition process. To do.

<Processing during pseudo bonus>
FIGS. 141 and 142 are flowcharts showing the pseudo bonus medium process executed in step S433 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter is 0 (S530). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the pseudo bonus navigation counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 is zero.

  If it is determined in step S530 that the value of the pseudo bonus navigation counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the pseudo bonus navigation counter based on the pseudo bonus reference table (see FIG. 45). (S531). In this process, since the value of the pseudo bonus navigation counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 determines that the current game is the first game in the pseudo bonus state, refers to the pseudo bonus reference table, and executes it. The value of the pseudo bonus navigation counter associated with the pseudo bonus type is set.

  After executing the process of step S531 or in the process of step S530, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo bonus navigation counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the push order navigation for winning the 8 bell combination. It is determined whether or not to execute (S532). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to a probability table (not shown) and determines by lottery whether or not to execute a push order navigation for winning an 8-bell combination when the push order bell is won.

  If it is determined in the process of step S532 that push order navigation for winning the eight bell combination is executed (YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter (S533). In this process, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter since the push order navigation for winning the eight-bell combination is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the notification timing flag is ON (S534). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a notification timing flag stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 is set. Here, when the first and second pseudo bonus selection effects are selected by the player, the notification timing flag is determined to notify that the player has won the AT state at the notification timing determined by lottery. This flag is set in the case.

  If it is determined in the process of step S534 that the notification timing flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 stores the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter, the value stored in the notification timing counter, Are the same (S535). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the notification timing for notifying that the player has won the AT state has arrived due to the execution of the push order navigation for winning the eight-bell combination in step S532.

  If it is determined in step S535 that the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter is the same as the value stored in the notification timing counter (YES), the sub CPU 102 enters the AT state. An AT state notification effect for notifying that the player has won is executed (S536). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes an AT state notification effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus selection effect selected by the player. For example, when the player selects the first pseudo bonus selection effect, the sub CPU 102 executes the first AT state notification effect.

  By the processing of step S535 and step S536, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is selected before the start of the pseudo bonus state by the player when the transition to the pseudo bonus state is determined and the ART lottery is won. In the first AT state notification effect as a notification mode based on the pseudo bonus selection effect that has been made, it is notified at the notification timing determined by lottery that the AT winning is set in the ART determination storing area as the ART determination. Therefore, the player can imagine the future development of the game and the like from the timing of the effect informed according to the selected pseudo bonus selection effect and the timing at which the first AT state notification effect is executed. It is possible to broaden the range of strategies and enhance the interest in the development of games.

  In this way, the sub CPU 102 that executes the AT state notification effect in the notification mode based on the pseudo bonus selection effect selected by the player while winning the AT state constitutes a winning notification means.

  After performing the process of step S536, if it is determined in the process of step S532 that the push order navigation for winning the eight-bell combination is not performed (NO), the notification timing flag is OFF in the process of step S534. When it is determined (NO) or when it is determined in the process of step S535 that the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter is different from the value stored in the notification timing counter (NO). Then, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART bonus lottery process during the pseudo bonus (S537). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines the ART bonus random lottery table to be referred to based on the ART bonus and the pseudo bonus color type stored in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 ((a) in FIGS. 56 to 58). (B) is determined, and the ART lottery process is executed with reference to the determined pseudo-bonus ART lottery table.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 (S538). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the pseudo bonus ART lottery executed in step S <b> 537 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery permission flag for the first AT state game number during pseudo bonus is ON (S539). In this process, if it is determined that the first AT state game number extra lottery permission flag during pseudo bonus is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the first AT state game number extra lottery process during pseudo bonus. Execute (S540). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the first AT state game number addition lottery table (see FIGS. 96A and 96B) to be referred to based on whether or not the ART is successful, and the determined first AT state. With reference to the game number addition lottery table, the first AT state game number to be added is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the first AT state game number determined to be added as a result of the process of step S540 to the first AT state game number counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. (S541). In this process, the sub CPU 102 can add the first AT state game number by lottery when winning the AT state.

  After executing the process of step S541 or in the process of step S539, if it is determined that the first AT state game number addition lottery permission flag during pseudo bonus is OFF (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo bonus is in progress. The pseudo bonus extra lottery process is executed (S542). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to a probability table (not shown) and determines whether or not the player has won the pseudo bonus added state by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus medium bonus bonus added state lottery executed in the process of step S542 has been won (S543). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus extra lottery is won (YES), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the pseudo bonus extra stock counter (S544). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the pseudo bonus added state stock counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 increments the pseudo bonus bonus counter by 1 (S545). In this process, the sub CPU 102 is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 because it wins the pseudo bonus extra lottery during the pseudo bonus, that is, a pseudo bonus extra state where at least one AT bonus is added. 1 is added to the pseudo bonus bonus counter which is a counter for counting the number of times the pseudo bonus ART lottery is won.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus medium addition bonus lottery winning flag (S546). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus medium bonus bonus added state lottery winning flag stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  If it is determined after the process of step S546 or in the process of step S543 that the pseudo bonus medium bonus bonus lottery has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the result of the pseudo bonus ART lottery is It is determined whether or not the state is won (S547). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the AT winning number associated with the AT winning is won in the pseudo bonus ART lottery process executed in step S537.

  If it is determined in step S547 that the AT state has been won (YES), 1 is added to the pseudo bonus extra counter (S548). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the pseudo bonus medium addition counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the number of first AT state games during the pseudo bonus and turns on the lottery permission flag (S549). Next, the sub CPU 102 turns on the ART bonus lottery winning flag during the pseudo bonus (S550). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo-bonus ART lottery winning flag for identifying that the AT winning number associated with the AT winning is won in the pseudo-bonus ART lottery process executed in step S537.

  After executing the process of step S550 or in the process of step S547, if it is determined that the AT state has not been won (NO), the sub CPU 102 has the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter being zero. Whether or not (S551). In this process, when it is determined that the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo bonus process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S551 that the value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the notification timing flag OFF (S552). In this process, the sub CPU 102 turns off the notification timing flag because the pseudo bonus state ends.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pseudo bonus selection effect set in the pseudo bonus selection effect storage area is the third pseudo bonus selection effect (S553).

  If it is determined in step S553 that the third pseudo bonus selection effect is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the third pseudo bonus selection effect execution end effect lottery process (S554). ). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes a predetermined number of times of push order navigation in the pseudo bonus state executed in a state where the player selects the third pseudo bonus selection effect, and is set in the pseudo bonus navigation counter. Therefore, referring to the third pseudo bonus selection effect execution end effect lottery table (see FIG. 107), the fact that the pseudo bonus state has ended is notified and set from the next game. By suggesting the normal mode to be performed, in the next normal lottery bonus bonus ART lottery to be referred to, the normal pseudo bonus bonus hour lottery table (see (a) to (c) of FIGS. 52 to 54). ) To determine the content of the end effect.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is based on the normal mode in which any one normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table is set from a plurality of normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery tables. Since the ART lottery is executed based on the selected normal-time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table, the probability of shifting to the AT state differs depending on the set normal mode, and the third pseudo-bonus selection effect is selected. In such a case, since the effect suggesting the set normal mode is executed at the end of the pseudo bonus state, the progress of the game can be easily predicted.

  After determining that the third pseudo bonus selection effect is not set after executing the process of step S554 or in the process of step S553 (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the process at the end of the pseudo bonus ( S555), the process during the pseudo bonus is ended. In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes a process of ending the pseudo bonus state and determining the content of the effect in the next game.

  Here, the sub CPU 102 performs the during-AT pseudo bonus type lottery process executed during the AT state (step S625 of the first AT state process shown in FIGS. 147 and 148 and the second pseudo process shown in FIGS. 149 to 151). In step S666 in the AT state process), when the first to fourth pseudo bonus states are executed by winning the pseudo bonus types 1 to 6, the process of step S555, which is the end of the pseudo bonus state, is executed. At the time of execution, a special mode suggestion effect that is an effect suggesting the special mode set in the special mode storage area is executed. Here, details of the special mode suggestion effect will be described later.

  As described above, in the AT state, it is determined to shift to the pseudo bonus state, the determined pseudo bonus state is set to the sub game state, and the special mode storage area is set at the end of the determined pseudo bonus state. The sub CPU 102 that executes the special mode effect indicating the special mode is configured as a special mode suggestion effect executing means at the end of the pseudo special game state.

<Processing at the end of the pseudo bonus>
FIGS. 143 and 144 are flowcharts showing the pseudo bonus end process executed in step S555 of the pseudo bonus middle process shown in FIGS. 141 and 142.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a value larger than 0 is stored in the pseudo bonus added state stock navigation counter (S560). Here, the pseudo bonus added state stock navigation counter is a counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 103, and when the pseudo bonus type 8 associated with the special pseudo bonus state is won during the pseudo bonus added state. The value stored in the pseudo bonus navigation counter is stored at the time of the hit.

  If it is determined in step S560 that a value greater than 0 is stored in the pseudo bonus added state stock navigation counter (YES), the sub CPU 102 stores the pseudo bonus added state stock navigation counter in the pseudo bonus added state stock navigation counter. The stored value is stored, and the pseudo bonus added state stock navigation counter is initialized (S561). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type 7 associated with the pseudo bonus added state in the pseudo bonus type stock table (S562), and ends the process at the end of the pseudo bonus. In these processes, since the special pseudo bonus state won during the pseudo bonus extra state has been completed, the sub CPU 102 resumes the pseudo bonus extra state being executed from the next game.

  In the process of step S560, if it is determined that the value stored in the pseudo bonus added state stock navigation counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table. Is a pseudo bonus type 7 (S563). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the executed pseudo bonus state is a pseudo bonus added state.

  If it is determined in the process of step S563 that the pseudo bonus type is the pseudo bonus type 7 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo bonus extra state guarantee lottery process (S564). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the value stored in the pseudo bonus extra counter and the ART bonus lottery table at the time of pseudo bonus extra state execution (see FIG. 88), and the AT state is one set in the pseudo bonus extra state. If not stocked, a process of stocking one set is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 (S565). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the pseudo bonus added state guarantee lottery executed in step S564 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  After executing the processing of step S565 or in the processing of step S563, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type is not the pseudo bonus type 7 (NO), the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus medium addition counter (S566). ). In this process, the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus extra counter since the pseudo bonus state has ended.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a value larger than 0 is stored in the pseudo bonus added state stock counter (S567). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is stocked in the pseudo bonus added state in the pseudo bonus state.

  If it is determined in the process of step S567 that a value greater than 0 is stored in the pseudo bonus added state stock counter (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type 7 in the pseudo bonus type stock table ( In S568, the pseudo bonus added state stock counter is decremented by 1 (S569), the pseudo bonus transition state is set in the sub game state storage area (S570), and the process at the end of the pseudo bonus is ended. In these processes, the sub CPU 102 changes the added bonus bonus state stocked in the pseudo bonus state to the pseudo bonus state to be executed next, reduces the stock by one, and shifts the sub gaming state to the pseudo bonus transition state.

  In the process of step S567, when it is determined that the value stored in the pseudo bonus added state stock counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus type (S571). In this process, the sub CPU 102 deletes the currently executed pseudo bonus type from the pseudo bonus type stock table.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the top value of the pseudo bonus type stock table is greater than 0 (S572). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type is stocked in the pseudo bonus added state stock table.

  If it is determined in the process of step S572 that the top value of the pseudo bonus type stock table is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 uses the top value of the pseudo bonus type stock table as the pseudo bonus type stock table. Is set as (S573). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type stocked in the pseudo bonus type stock table in the pseudo bonus type stock table as a pseudo bonus type to be referred to from the next game.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state transition flag is ON (S574). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state transition flag is OFF (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus transition state in the sub gaming state storage area (S575), and at the end of the pseudo bonus. The process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S574 that the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state transition flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state in the sub gaming state storage area (S576). Then, the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state transition flag is turned OFF (S577), and the process at the end of the pseudo bonus is ended.

  If it is determined in the process of step S572 that the top value of the pseudo bonus type stock table is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART win / loss set in the ART pass / fail storage area is AT win. It is determined whether or not (S578). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an AT winning number associated with the AT winning is won in any of the ART lotteries.

  If it is determined in step S578 that the AT is a win (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the first AT state in the sub gaming state storage area (S579), and first AT state start pre-processing Is executed (S580). In these processes, the sub CPU 102 starts the first AT state for determining each control information for determining the contents of the effect to be executed in the first AT state starting from the next game and whether or not the AT state is continued. Perform pre-processing.

  In this way, when the AT state is won, the sub CPU 102 that shifts the sub gaming state to the first AT state of the AT state after the pseudo bonus state ends, constitutes a first specific effect state transition means. .

  Next, the sub CPU 102 initializes the AT state non-winning counter (S581), and ends the pseudo bonus end process. In this process, since the sub CPU 102 has won the AT state, the sub CPU 102 initializes the AT state non-winning counter.

  If it is determined in step S578 that the AT is not winning (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes other highly-probable transition game number lottery processing, and the corresponding lottery result (high-accuracy counter and Stored in the high-accuracy counter) (S582), the normal state is set in the secondary gaming state storage area (S583), and the process at the end of the pseudo bonus is ended. In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the probability state is highly accurate or ultrahighly accurate from the start in the normal state that is started after the end of the pseudo bonus state. To determine by lottery.

  Here, the other highly accurate transition game number lottery tables are five lottery tables similar to the highly accurate transition game number random determination table (see (a) to (d) of FIGS. 42 to 44). The sub CPU 102 refers to the normal mode set in the normal mode storage area, and determines the other highly probable transition game number lottery table to be referred to. In addition, in the other highly probable game number lottery table, each probability state and the number of games in which the probability state continues are associated with different lottery values for each sub game state set in the sub game state storage area. Yes.

<First AT state start pre-processing>
FIGS. 145 and 146 show the state before the start of the first AT state executed in step S580 of the pseudo bonus end process shown in FIGS. 143 and 144 and step S738 of the second AT state end process shown in FIG. 153. It is a flowchart which shows a process.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the special mode is set in the special mode storage area (S590). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of the special modes 1 to 6 is set in the special mode stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  If it is determined in step S590 that the special mode is not set (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the special mode 1 in the special mode storage area (S591). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the special mode 1 set in the initial state of the first AT state in the special mode storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets 0 in the special table information counter (S592). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets 0 as an initial value in a special table information counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes special table lottery processing (S593), and sets the lottery result in the special table number (S594). In these processes, the sub CPU 102 determines a special table with reference to the special table lottery table (see FIG. 60), and the special table number stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 is determined. Set to a number.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a normal time flag in the loop lottery state (S595), sets a normal time flag in the first AT state game number lottery state (S596), and sets a normal time flag in the special mode lottery state. Set (S597). In these processes, the sub CPU 102 has each of a loop lottery state, a first AT state game number lottery state, and a special mode lottery state among the AT state flags stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. Set the normal time flag to.

  After determining that the special mode is set after executing the process of step S597 or in the process of step S590 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines the special mode table by referring to the special mode table reference table. Then, the determined special mode table number is set in the special mode table number (S598). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the special mode table by referring to the special mode table reference table based on the value set in the special table information counter and the value set in the special table number. The determined special mode table number is set in the special mode table number stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the first AT state start special mode table ART lottery process (S599). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table (FIG. 62 (a), (reference)) based on the flag set in the first AT state game number lottery state. b) see) is determined, and the ART lottery is executed with reference to the determined first AT state start special mode table ART lottery table.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 (S600). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the pseudo bonus added state guarantee lottery executed in step S599 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a first AT state game number random determination process (S601). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the first AT state game number random determination table (see FIG. 95) and determines the first AT state game number that is the number of times that the unit game is executed in the first AT state. To do.

  In this way, in the first AT state start pre-processing executed when the pseudo bonus state is shifted to the first AT state, the sub CPU 102 that determines the first AT state game number is the first specified An effect state game number determination means is configured.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the first AT state game number determined as a result of the process of step S601 to the first AT state game number counter (S602). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 stores the determined first AT state game number in the first AT state game number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a normal time flag in the first AT state game number lottery state (S603). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a special mode transition lottery process at the start of the first AT state (S604). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 refers to the first AT state start special mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 5) based on the special mode set in the special mode storage area and the flag set in the special mode lottery state. 63 to FIG. 71), and the special mode is determined with reference to the determined first AT state start special mode transition lottery table.

  In this way, in the second AT state, a plurality of second AT state pseudo bonus lottery tables (in FIGS. 73 to 82) having different winning probabilities determined to shift the sub game state to the pseudo bonus state. The sub CPU 102 that selects at least one of the special modes to be referred to when determining the pseudo bonus lottery table in the second AT state to be referred to from each of (a) and (b)). Constitutes special mode selection means.

  Further, in the process of step S604, the sub CPU 102 determines the special mode, special mode suggestion effect (see FIG. 157) executed in the first AT state, and special mode notification effect executed in the second AT state. (See FIG. 158). Here, the special mode suggestion effect is an effect suggesting the determined special mode. The special mode notification effect is an effect of notifying the determined special mode. Details of the special mode suggestion effect and the special mode notification effect will be described later.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is selected in the second AT state while the special mode suggesting effect suggesting the selected special mode is executed in the first AT state. Since the special mode notification effect for informing the special mode is executed, different effects related to the special mode are executed in the first and second half of one AT state, and the player's expectation for the selected special mode is maintained. be able to.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the special mode determined as a result of the process of step S601 in the special mode storage area (S605). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the determined special mode in the special mode storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a normal time flag in the special mode lottery state (S606). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value stored in the special mode 6 stock counter is greater than 0 (S607).

  If it is determined in step S607 that the value stored in the special mode 6 stock counter is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the special mode 6 flag (S608). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 turns on the special mode 6 flag and sets the special mode 6 in the special mode storage area. Thus, the sub CPU 102 is configured to give priority to the special mode 6 even when other special modes 1 to 5 are already set.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 decrements the special mode 6 stock counter by 1 (S609). In this processing, since the special mode 6 is set, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the number of special mode 6 sets set in the special mode 6 stock counter.

  If it is determined in step S607 that the value stored in the special mode 6 stock counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 turns off the special mode 6 flag (S610).

  After executing the process of step S609 or step S610, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART loop lottery process (S611). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the flag set in the loop lottery type, the value set in the loop stock counter, the special mode set in the special mode storage area, and the AT continuation type storage area. Based on the determined AT continuation type, an ART loop lottery table to be referred to (see FIGS. 85A to 85G) is determined, and the loop reference stock table is determined by referring to the determined ART loop lottery table. The ART loop lottery is executed based on the loop rate set in.

  Here, when the set number is set in the loop stock counter, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART loop lottery table shown in FIG. It is configured to win any continuation or special continuation. In addition, when referring to the ART loop lottery table shown in FIG. 85A, the sub CPU 102 wins one of “no continuation”, “continuation”, and “special continuation” depending on the loop rate set in the loop reference stock table. It is configured.

  As described above, when the sub CPU 102 executes the continuous transition according to the number of sets stored in the loop stock counter and digests the number of sets stored in the loop stock counter, the loop set in the loop reference stock table. Based on the rate, it is configured to determine whether to perform a continuous transition.

  Thereby, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs the ART lottery when the transition to the pseudo bonus state is determined, and sets the loop rate determined at the non-winning time when the ART lottery is not winning. Since the number can be carried over until the ART lottery is won, when the ART lottery is finally won, an increase in the game loop rate and the number of sets in the AT state can be expected. Even if the AT state does not start after the game is over, the player's interest in the game can be maintained until the player wins the ART lottery, and the player's expectation that the AT state will continue for a long time A game can be played with

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the AT continuation type determined as a result of the process of step S611 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (S612). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the determined AT continuation type in the AT continuation type storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the flag set in the loop lottery state is a normal time flag (S613). In this process, when it is determined that the normal time flag is not set in the loop lottery state (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the first AT state start pre-processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S613 that the normal flag is set in the loop lottery state (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value stored in the loop stock counter is greater than zero. Is determined (S614). In this process, when it is determined that the value stored in the loop stock counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the first AT state start pre-process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S614 that the value stored in the loop stock counter is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value stored in the loop stock counter. In step S615, the first AT state start pre-processing is terminated.

<Processing during the first AT state>
FIG. 147 and FIG. 148 are flowcharts showing the first AT state processing executed in step S425 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG.

  When executing the first AT state process, the sub CPU 102 executes the special mode suggesting effect determined in step S604 of the first AT state start pre-process (see FIGS. 145 and 146). In this way, the sub CPU 102 constitutes a special mode suggestion effect executing means.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART navigation lottery process (S620). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines an ART navigation lottery table to be referred to (see FIGS. 59A and 59B) based on the effect gaming state stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95, and the determination. With reference to the ART navigation lottery table, the lottery of the push order navigation for winning the eight-bell role is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 decrements the first AT state game number counter by 1 (S621). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S622). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won in the pseudo bonus type lottery executed in the previous processing during the first AT state.

  If it is determined in the process of step S622 that any one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the warning signal process (S623) and is in the first AT state. The process ends. In this process, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to a precursor state where the promotion lottery is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S622 that none of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (NO), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the pseudo bonus ceiling counter (S624).

  Next, the sub CPU executes a pseudo bonus type lottery process during the first AT state (S625). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the first AT state pseudo bonus lottery table to be referenced (see FIGS. 72A and 72B) based on the AT probability state set in the AT probability state storage area. ) And a pseudo bonus type lottery is executed with reference to the determined pseudo bonus lottery table during the first AT state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the pseudo bonus type lottery executed in step S625 in the pseudo bonus type stock table (S626). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S627). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is won in the pseudo bonus type lottery during the first AT state executed in step S625.

  If it is determined in the process of step S627 that any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table is the pseudo bonus type 5 Or it is judged whether it is pseudo bonus classification 6 (S628). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type is 5 or the pseudo bonus type 6 (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state flag (S629). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus promotion gaming state flag stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  After executing the process of step S629 or in the process of step S628, when determining that the pseudo bonus type 5 or the pseudo bonus type 6 is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus ceiling counter. (S630). In this process, the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus ceiling counter because the pseudo bonus state lottery in the first AT state executed in step S625 has been won.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 initializes the same color high-accuracy counter (S631). Here, the same color high accuracy counter is a counter stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 103, and is executed in a state in which the same color high accuracy is set when the sub CPU 102 selects the same color high accuracy as the in-AT probability state. The number of games is stored.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus continuation flag during the first AT state in the first AT state game number lottery state and the special mode lottery state (S632). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus continuation flag during the first AT state in the first AT state effect state (S633).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (S634). In this process, if it is determined that NO continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets a normal time flag in the loop lottery state (S635).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S634 that NO continuation is not set in the AT continuation type storage area (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus continuation flag during the first AT state to the loop lottery state. Is set (S636).

  In the processing of step S634 to step S636, when the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus state in a state where continuation or special continuation is set as the AT continuation type, the sub CPU 102 is executed after the corresponding pseudo bonus state ends. In step S611 of the first AT state start pre-processing (see FIGS. 145 and 146), the continuation or special continuation is surely won.

  After executing the processing of step S635 or step S636, the sub CPU 102 adds the number of first AT state games during the pseudo bonus and turns on the lottery permission flag (S637). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART lottery process during pseudo bonus winning during the AT state (S638). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table (in the AT state to be referenced) based on the sub game state set in the sub game state storage region and the special mode set in the special mode storage region. 83 (a) and 84 (b)) are determined, and the ART lottery is executed with reference to the determined AT bonus pseudo lottery table during the AT state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 (639). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the ART bonus pseudo lottery ART lottery executed in step S638 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103, respectively.

  If it is determined in step S627 that none of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value stored in the same color high-accuracy counter is greater than zero. Judgment is made (S640). In this process, if it is determined that the value stored in the same color high accuracy counter is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value stored in the same color high accuracy counter ( S641).

  After executing the process of step S641 or in the process of step S640, if it is determined that the value stored in the same color high-accuracy counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the same color during the first AT state. A highly accurate lottery process is executed (S642). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to a probability table (not shown) and sets the same color accuracy when setting the same color probability as the AT probability state and the AT probability state. The number of games to be executed in the played state is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the result of the same color high accuracy transition lottery executed in step S642 to the corresponding same color high accuracy counter (S643). In this process, if a value is already stored in the same color high accuracy counter, the sub CPU 102 adds the result of the same color high accuracy transition lottery executed in step S642 in the first AT state to the already stored value. To do.

  After executing the processing of step S639 or step S643, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table is the pseudo bonus type 8 (S644). In this process, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 8 is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the precursor counter is (S645).

  If it is determined in the process of step S645 that the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the first AT state precursor game number lottery process (S646). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to a probability table (not shown) and executes the sign game number lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number determined in step S646 is larger than the value stored in the first AT state game number counter (S647). In this process, if it is determined that the value of the number of precursor games determined in step S646 is larger than the value stored in the first AT state game number counter (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines The value set in the first AT state game number counter is set in the counter (S648).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S647 that the value of the number of precursor games determined in step S646 is smaller than the value stored in the first AT state game number counter (NO), The CPU 102 sets the value of the number of precursor games determined in step S646 to the precursor counter (S649).

  In the processing of step S647 to step S649, when the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus state during the first AT state, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to the pseudo bonus state through a relatively small number of precursor states. To do.

  If it is determined in step S645 that the value set in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 displays the BAR symbol in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 when the normal replay is won. It is determined whether or not to perform push order navigation that can be performed (S650). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to a probability table (not shown) to determine whether or not to execute a push order navigation that can display the BAR symbol in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 at the time of normal replay winning. .

  In the process of step S650, if it is determined that the push order navigation is not executed as a result of lottery (NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value set in the precursor counter (S651).

  When it is determined in the process of step S644 that the pseudo bonus type 8 is set (YES) or in the process of step S650, when it is determined that push order navigation is to be executed as a result of lottery (YES), the sub CPU 102 Initializes the precursor counter (S652).

  After executing the processing of step S648, step S649 or step S652, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S653). ). In this process, when it is determined that any one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the precursor counter is 0. (S654). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process during the first AT state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S654 that the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the state transition common processing shown in FIG. S655), the first AT state processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in the processing of step S653 that none of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the value set in the first AT state game number counter to 0. It is determined whether or not there is (S656). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the first AT state game number counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the first AT state process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S656 that the value set in the first AT state game number counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the special table information counter (S657). ), The second AT state is set in the auxiliary gaming state storage area (S658), and the processing in the first AT state is terminated. In these processes, since the first AT state game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 determines that all the unit games executed in the first AT state have ended, and adds 1 to the special table information counter. At the same time, the second AT state is started from the next game.

  As described above, in the first AT state, when the unit game of the first AT state game number determined in the first AT state start pre-processing (see FIGS. 145 and 146) is executed, the sub gaming state is changed. The sub CPU 102 that shifts to the second AT state among the AT states constitutes a second specific effect state transition means.

<Processing during the second AT state>
FIGS. 149 to 151 are flowcharts showing the second AT state processing executed in step S427 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG.

  Note that, when executing the process during the second AT state, the sub CPU 102 executes the special mode notification effect determined in step S604 of the first AT state start pre-process (see FIGS. 145 and 146). Thus, the sub CPU 102 constitutes a special mode notification effect executing means.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the second AT state game number counter is 0 (S660). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the second AT state game number counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 is zero.

  If it is determined in the process of step S660 that the value set in the second AT state game number counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the second AT state initial process (S661). ). In this process, since the second AT state game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 is the first time that the second AT state game number is not yet set after the end of the first AT state. And the second AT state initial process for determining the contents of the second AT state game and the contents of the effect executed in the second AT state.

  After executing the process of step S661 or in the process of step S660, if it is determined that a value other than 0 is set in the second AT state game number counter (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines the ART navigation lottery. The process is executed (S662). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines an ART navigation lottery table to be referred to (see FIGS. 59A and 59B) based on the effect gaming state stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95, and the determination. With reference to the ART navigation lottery table, the lottery of the push order navigation for winning the eight-bell role is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 decrements the second AT state game number counter by 1 (S663). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S664). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won in the pseudo bonus type lottery executed in the previous processing during the second AT state.

  If it is determined in step S664 that none of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (NO), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the pseudo bonus ceiling counter (S665).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the pseudo bonus type lottery process during the second AT state, and sets the result of the executed pseudo bonus type lottery in the pseudo bonus type stock table (S666). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the second AT state pseudo bonus lottery to be referred to based on the special mode set in the special mode storage area and the in-AT probability state storage area. A table (see FIGS. 73 to 82) is determined, and a pseudo bonus type lottery is executed with reference to the determined pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state.

  In this way, whether or not to shift the sub gaming state to the pseudo bonus state based on the winning probability set in the pseudo bonus lottery table during the second AT state determined based on the special mode set by the sub CPU 102. The sub CPU 102 that determines the above-mentioned configuration constitutes the pseudo special game state lottery means during the specific effect state.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a plurality of second AT state pseudo bonus lotteries with different winning probabilities determined to shift the sub game state to the pseudo bonus state during the AT state. Transition to the pseudo bonus state when a plurality of special modes that are determined to shift to the pseudo bonus state with a high probability are selected. Since the probability of being determined is extremely high, it is possible to increase the expectation that the player can win the pseudo-bonus state even during the AT state, and it is possible to concentrate on the game even during the AT state. Can be improved.

  Also, as shown in steps S625 and S666, whether or not the bonus bonus types 5 and 6 out of the bonus bonus types 1 to 8 are won in the first AT state and the second AT state is determined by lottery. The sub CPU 102 constitutes third specific effect state lottery means.

  With this configuration, when the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment wins the pseudo bonus state in the AT state, the pachislot machine 1 enters the pseudo bonus added state in which the number of sets in the AT state is added each time the pseudo bonus transition symbol is won Since it is possible to shift to the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state having the possibility of shifting, it is possible to make the player interested in the change of the gaming state in the AT state, and to further improve the interest in the game.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S667). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won in the pseudo bonus type lottery during the second AT state executed in step S666.

  If it is determined in the process of step S667 that any of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table is the pseudo bonus type 5 Or it is judged whether it is pseudo bonus classification 6 (S668). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type is 5 or the pseudo bonus type 6 (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state flag (S669). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus promotion gaming state flag stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  After executing the process of step S669 or in the process of step S668, when determining that the pseudo bonus type 5 or the pseudo bonus type 6 is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus ceiling counter. (S670). In this process, the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus ceiling counter because the pseudo bonus type lottery in the second AT state executed in step S666 has been won.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 initializes the same color high-accuracy counter (S671). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus continuation flag during the second AT state in the special mode lottery state (S672). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus continuation flag during the second AT state in the first AT state effect state (S673).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (S674). In this process, if it is determined that NO continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets a normal time flag in the loop lottery state (S675).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S674 that NO continuation is not set in the AT continuation type storage area (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus continuation flag during the second AT state to the loop lottery state. Is set (S676).

  In the processing of step S674 to step S676, when the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus state in a state where continuation or special continuation is set as the AT continuation type, the sub CPU 102 is executed after the corresponding pseudo bonus state ends. In step S611 of the first AT state start pre-processing (see FIGS. 145 and 146), the continuation or special continuation is surely won.

  After executing the process of step S675 or step S676, the sub CPU 102 adds the number of first AT state games during the pseudo bonus and turns the lottery permission flag ON (S677). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART lottery process during pseudo bonus winning during the AT state (S678). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table (in the AT state to be referenced) based on the sub game state set in the sub game state storage region and the special mode set in the special mode storage region. 83 (a) and 84 (b)) are determined, and the ART lottery is executed with reference to the determined AT bonus pseudo lottery table during the AT state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 (679). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the ART bonus pseudo lottery ART lottery executed in step S678 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103, respectively.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the special continuation game number counter is larger (S680). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the special continuation game number counter stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 is greater than zero.

  If it is determined in step S680 that a value greater than 0 is set in the special continuation game number counter (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes ART lottery processing when a special condition is satisfied (S681). In this process, the sub CPU 102 makes a transition from the next game to the precursor state or the pseudo bonus state from the second AT state, that is, the second AT state ends in the current game, and the number of special continued games. Since the counter is not 0, it is determined that the special condition is satisfied, and the ART lottery when the special condition is satisfied is executed with reference to the ART lottery table when the special condition is satisfied (see FIG. 87). In addition, when executing the process of step S681, the sub CPU 102 executes a special effect which is a continuous notification mode selected when the special condition is satisfied, and notifies that the AT state is continuously shifted.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 (S682). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the ART lottery executed when the special condition is executed in step S <b> 681 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  As shown in Step S667 and Step S680 to Step S682, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART lottery table when the special condition is satisfied when the special effect is executed and it is determined to shift the sub game state to the pseudo bonus state. The loop rate is determined, and the determined loop rate is stocked in the loop reference stock table.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is informed of the continuation notification mode selected when the special condition is satisfied, thereby notifying the player of the winning of the pseudo bonus state and the AT Since it is suggested that the loop rate of the state is newly stored, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect mode executed in the AT state, and to improve the interest in the game.

  If it is determined in step S667 that none of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value stored in the same color high-accuracy counter is greater than zero. Judgment is made (S683). In this process, if it is determined that the value stored in the same color high accuracy counter is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value stored in the same color high accuracy counter ( S684).

  After executing the process of step S684 or in the process of step S683, if it is determined that the value stored in the same color high-accuracy counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the same color during the second AT state. A highly accurate lottery process is executed (S685). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to a probability table (not shown) and sets the same color accuracy when setting the same color probability as the AT probability state and the AT probability state. The number of games to be executed in the played state is determined by lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the result of the same color high accuracy transition lottery executed in step S685 to the corresponding same color high accuracy counter (S686). In this process, if a value is already stored in the same color high accuracy counter, the sub CPU 102 adds the result of the same color high accuracy transition lottery executed in step S685 in the second AT state to the already stored value. To do.

  After executing the processing of step S682 or step S686, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus type set in the pseudo bonus type stock table is the pseudo bonus type 8 (S687). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus type 8 is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the precursor counter is (S688).

  If it is determined in the process of step S688 that the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the second AT state precursor game number lottery process (S689). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to a probability table (not shown) and executes the sign game number lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number determined in step S689 is larger than the value stored in the second AT state game number counter (S690). In this process, when it is determined that the value of the number of precursor games determined in step S689 is larger than the value stored in the second AT state game number counter (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines The value set in the second AT state game number counter is set in the counter (S691).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S690 that the value of the number of precursor games determined in step S689 is smaller than the value stored in the second AT state game number counter (NO), The CPU 102 sets the value of the number of precursor games determined in step S689 in the precursor counter (S692).

  In the processing of step S690 to step S692, when the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus state during the second AT state, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to the pseudo bonus state via a relatively small number of precursor states. To do.

  If it is determined in step S688 that the value set in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 displays the BAR symbol in the middle of the reel display window 4 when the normal replay is won. It is determined whether or not to perform push order navigation that can be performed (S693). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to a probability table (not shown) to determine whether or not to execute a push order navigation that can display the BAR symbol in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 at the time of normal replay winning. .

  In the process of step S693, if it is determined that the push order navigation is not executed as a result of lottery (NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value set in the precursor counter (S694).

  If it is determined in the process of step S687 that the pseudo bonus type 8 is set (YES) or if it is determined in the process of step S693 that push order navigation is executed as a result of lottery (YES), the sub CPU 102 Initializes the precursor counter (S695).

  After executing the processing of step S691, step S692 or step S695, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus types set in the pseudo bonus type stock table are the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 (S696). ). In this process, when it is determined that any one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the precursor counter is 0. (S697). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the second AT state process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S697 that the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the second AT state game number counter (S698). The continuation game number counter is initialized (S699), the state transition common process at the end of the precursor shown in FIG. 139 is executed (S700), and the second AT state process ends. In this process, the sub CPU 102 changes the sub game state from the next game to any one of the pseudo bonus state, the pseudo bonus promotion game state, or the pseudo bonus transition state. The counter is initialized and the state transition common process at the end of the precursor is executed.

  If it is determined in step S696 that none of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the value set in the second AT state game number counter to 0. It is determined whether or not there is (S701). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the second AT state game number counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the second AT state end process (S702). Then, the processing during the second AT state is terminated. In this process, when the continuation or special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area, the sub CPU 102 sets the first AT state in the sub gaming state storage area after the end of the second AT state. The process at the end of the AT state is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the value set in the second AT state game number counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 is set in the special continuous game number counter. It is determined whether or not the value is greater than 0 (S703). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the special continuation game number counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the second AT state process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S703 that the value set in the special continuation game number counter is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 decrements the special continuation game number counter by 1 (S704). In this process, the sub CPU 102 decrements the special continuation game number counter by 1 because one unit game has been executed with the special continuation set in the AT continuation type storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the special continuation game number counter is 0 (S705). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the special continuation game number counter is not 0, the sub CPU 102 ends the second AT state process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S705 that the value set in the special continuation game number counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets continuation in the AT continuation type storage area (S706). Then, the processing during the second AT state is terminated. In this process, since the value set in the second AT state game number counter is greater than 0 and the value set in the special continuation game number counter becomes 0, the sub CPU 102 Since the special effect is not executed in the second AT state being executed, the continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area, and the effect executed in the state where the special continuation is set is ended.

  If it is determined in the process of step S664 that any one of the pseudo bonus types 1 to 8 is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a warning signal process (S707). In this process, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to a precursor state where the promotion lottery is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (S708). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the precursor counter is not 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the second AT state process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S708 that the value set in the precursor counter is 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the second AT state game number counter (S709) The continuation game number counter is initialized (S710), and the second AT state processing is terminated. In this process, the sub CPU 102 initializes the second AT state game number counter and the special continuation game number counter because the sub gaming state becomes a precursor state from the next game.

<Second AT state initial processing>
FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the second AT state initial process executed in step S661 of the second AT state process shown in FIGS. 149 to 151.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (S720). In this process, if it is determined that special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes special continuation special mode transition lottery processing (S721), and determines the lottery result. The special mode storage area is set (S722).

  In the processing of step S720 to step S722, when the special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area, the sub CPU 102 refers to the special continuation special mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 86) and displays the current special mode. A special continuation special mode transition lottery is executed, which has a possibility of selecting a special mode more advantageous to the player than the special mode set in the storage area, and the lottery result is set in the special mode storage area.

  After executing the process of step S722 or in the process of step S720, if it is determined that the special continuation is not set in the AT continuation type storage area (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines the second AT state game number lottery. Processing is executed (S723). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the second AT state game number lottery table to be referred to based on the AT continuation type set in the AT continuation type storage area and the special mode set in the special mode storage area (see FIG. 97 to FIG. 102), and with reference to the determined second AT state game number lottery table, the second AT state game number, which is the number of times the unit game is executed in the second AT state, is determined. To do.

  In this way, in the second AT state initial process that is executed when shifting from the first AT state to the second AT state, the sub CPU 102 that determines the number of second AT state games has the second specific effect. A state game number determination means is configured.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the second AT state game number determined as a result of the process of step S723 in the second AT state game number counter (S724). In this process, the sub CPU 102 stores the determined second AT state game number in the second AT state game number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (S725). In this process, if it is determined that special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes special continuation game number lottery processing (S726), and the result of lottery is special continuation. The game number counter is set (S727), and the second AT state initial process ends.

  In the processing of step S725 to step S727, when the special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area, the sub CPU 102 executes a special continuation game number lottery with reference to a probability table (not shown), and results of the lottery Is set in the special continuation game number counter to determine how many games to execute in the second AT state to be executed in the state where special continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area. .

  If it is determined in step S725 that the special continuation is not set in the AT continuation type storage area (NO), the sub CPU 102 initializes the special continuation game number counter (S728), and the second AT state. End the initial process.

<Second AT state end processing>
FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the second AT state initial process executed in step S702 of the second AT state process shown in FIGS. 149 to 151.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the AT continuation type set in the AT continuation type storage area is winning or special winning (S730). In this process, the sub CPU 102 shifts to the first AT state after the end of the second AT state as a result of the ART loop lottery executed in step S611 of the first AT state start pre-processing (see FIGS. 145 and 146). It is determined whether or not the AT continuation type for continuing the AT state or the special continuation is won.

  If it is determined in step S730 that NO continuation is set in the AT continuation type storage area (NO), the sub CPU 102 deletes the top loop rate of the loop reference stock table (S731). In this process, since the sub CPU 102 has executed the ART loop lottery based on the loop rate set at the head of the loop reference stock table in step S611 of the first AT state start pre-processing, Delete the loop rate set at the beginning.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the loop reference set at the head of the loop reference stock table is any of the loop references 1 to 5 (S732). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a loop reference that has not yet been used for the ART loop lottery remains in the loop reference stock table.

  In the process of step S730, when it is determined that the winning or special winning is made in the AT continuation type storage area (YES), or in the process of step S732, any one of the loop references 1 to 5 is added to the head of the loop reference stock table. If it is determined that it is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the first AT state in the sub gaming state storage area (S733). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes a continuous transition to set the first AT state in the sub gaming state storage area in order to start the first AT state from the next game after the end of the second AT state. After the end of the second AT state, the first AT state can be executed and the AT state can be continued.

  As described above, when the unit game of the second AT state number of games is executed, the sub CPU 102 that continues the AT state by continuously shifting the sub game state to the first AT state, Configure.

  Also, in the processing of step S731 to step S733, when a plurality of loop rates are stocked in the loop reference stock table at the start of the second AT state end processing, the sub CPU 102 relates to the stocked loop rates. It is configured to perform continuous migration.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can give a lot of benefits to the player when a plurality of loop rates are stored in the loop reference stock table of the sub RAM 103. Can be improved.

  Moreover, when performing the process of step S733, sub CPU102 is comprised so that the continuous alerting | reporting aspect which alert | reports that an AT state continues as a continuing alerting | reporting aspect is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a normal time flag in the first AT state effect state (S734). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value set in the special continuation game number counter is greater than 0 (S735).

  If it is determined in the process of step S735 that the value set in the special continuation game number counter is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery process when the special condition is satisfied (S736). In this process, the sub CPU 102 makes a transition from the next game to the first AT state from the second AT state, that is, the second AT state ends in the current game, and the special continued game number counter Is not 0, it is determined that the special condition is satisfied, and the ART lottery is executed when the special condition is satisfied.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 (737). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the ART lottery executed when the special condition is executed in step S736 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103, respectively.

  After executing the process of step S737 or in the process of step S735, when determining that the value set in the special continuation game number counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 starts the first AT state. Pre-processing is executed (S738), and the processing at the end of the second AT state ends. In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines each control information for determining the content of the effect to be executed in the first AT state starting from the next game and whether or not the AT state is continued before the first AT state starts. Execute the process.

  In the process of step S732, if it is determined that none of the loop references 1 to 5 is set at the head of the loop reference stock table (NO), the sub CPU 102 notifies the success or failure of the AT state. And the common process at the end of the AT state are executed (S739), and the second AT state end process is terminated. In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes a common process at the end of the AT state for initializing the flag and value stored in each storage area in order to start the normal state from the next game.

  As in the processing of step S681, step S733, and step S739, the sub CPU 102 that executes any one of a plurality of continuous notification modes that notify the continuation or non-continuation of the AT state constitutes a continuation information notification unit. .

<Common processing at the end of AT state>
FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing common processing at the end of AT, which is executed in step S739 of the processing at the end of second AT state shown in FIG. 153.

  First, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal state in the sub gaming state storage area (S740). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal state in the sub game state storage area in order to start the normal state from the next game.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus counter, the special table number, the special mode table number, the special mode storage area, the special table information counter, and the same color high accuracy counter (S741). In this process, the sub CPU 102 initializes each flag and value set in the pseudo bonus state and the AT state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a normal mode lottery table lottery process at the end of AT (S742). In this process, the sub CPU 102 is referred to in the normal state starting from the next game with reference to the normal mode lottery table lottery table at the end of AT (see (a) and (b) of FIGS. 40 and 41). A normal mode lottery table lottery is executed at the end of AT to determine the table to be selected.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the AT end normal mode lottery table lottery executed in step S742 in a table stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (S743).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes normal mode number determination processing (S744), and sets the normal mode associated with the determined normal mode number (S745). In these processes, the sub CPU 102 determines the normal mode number from the currently set table and the value set in the AT state non-winning counter with reference to the normal mode reference table (see FIG. 39). The normal mode associated with the determined normal mode number is set in the normal mode storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes other high-probability transition game number lottery processing (S746), stores the lottery results in the corresponding counters (high-precision counter and ultra-high-precision counter) (S747), and ends the AT. End common processing. In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the probability state is highly accurate or ultra-highly accurate from the start of the normal state in the normal state starting from the next game. To determine by lottery.

<Processing during pseudo bonus promotion game state>
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state process executed in step S429 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the old sub gaming state is a pseudo bonus promotion gaming state (S750). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game is the first game in the pseudo bonus promotion game state by determining whether or not the old sub game state is the pseudo bonus promotion game state. To do.

  If it is determined in step S750 that the old secondary gaming state is not the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets 10 in the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state game number counter (S751). In this process, since the current game is the first game in the pseudo bonus promotion game state, the sub CPU 102 stores the pseudo bonus promotion that stores the number of games in the pseudo bonus promotion game state stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. 10 is set as the predetermined number of games in the game state game number counter.

  After executing the process of step S751 or in the process of step S750, if it is determined that the old subsidiary gaming state is the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state (YES), the sub CPU 102 counts the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state game number counter. It is determined whether or not the set value is greater than 0 (S752). In this process, if it is determined that the value set in the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state game number counter is greater than 0 (YES), the sub CPU 102 decrements the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state game number counter by 1 (S753). ).

  On the other hand, in the process of step S752, when it is determined that the value set in the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state game number counter is 0 (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning order bell has been won. Judgment is made (S754). In this process, if it is determined that the push order bell is won (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state end flag to ON. Here, the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state end flag is a flag that is referred to in the winning operation command reception process (see FIG. 156), and is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  If it is determined in step S753, step S755, or step S754 that the hitting bell is not won (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes an ART navigation lottery process (S756). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines an ART navigation lottery table to be referred to (see FIGS. 59A and 59B) based on the effect gaming state stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95, and the determination. With reference to the ART navigation lottery table, the lottery of the push order navigation for winning the eight-bell role is executed. In this process, when the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state end flag is ON, the sub CPU 102 executes only the push order navigation related to the first stop operation among the determined push order navigations.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo bonus promotion lottery process (S757). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines each (d) of FIG. 47 and FIG. 48 based on the sub gaming state set in the sub gaming state storage area and the pseudo bonus color type stored in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. ), The pseudo bonus promotion lottery process is executed, and the result of the pseudo bonus promotion lottery is set in the pseudo bonus promotion lottery result storage area stored in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. . Here, since the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo bonus promotion lottery table shown in each of (d) of FIGS. 47 and 48, whether or not the pseudo bonus promotion lottery substantially wins the pseudo bonus type 7 or not. It will be a lottery.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning is set in the pseudo bonus promotion lottery result storage area (S758). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the promotion lottery is won in the pseudo bonus promotion lottery executed in step S757.

  If it is determined in step S758 that the pseudo bonus promotion lottery winning combination is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S758 that the pseudo bonus promotion lottery win is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state game number counter (S759). In this processing, since the sub CPU 102 has won the pseudo bonus type 7, the sub CPU 102 initializes the number of pseudo bonus promotion game state games in order to end the pseudo bonus promotion game state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type won by the promotion lottery at the end of the pseudo bonus type stock table (S760). In this processing, since the sub CPU 102 has won the pseudo bonus type 7, the sub bonus 102 sets the pseudo bonus type won at the end of the pseudo bonus type stock table.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus type 7 in the pseudo bonus type stock table (S761). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a pseudo bonus ART lottery process during the pseudo bonus winning (S762). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery process with reference to the pseudo bonus ART bonus lottery table (see FIG. 55).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes common processing after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 137 (S763). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 sets the result of the ART bonus lottery during pseudo bonus winning executed in step S <b> 762 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a pseudo bonus state in the sub gaming state storage area (S764), and ends the process during the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state. In this process, when the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus type 7 during the pseudo bonus promotion game state process, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state from the pseudo bonus promotion game state to the pseudo bonus state.

<Process when receiving a winning action command>
FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the winning action command reception process executed in step S411 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a pseudo bonus transition state is set in the sub game state storage area (S770). In this process, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus transition state is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a normal replay in which the pseudo bonus transition combination is performed (S771). . In this process, when it is determined that the normal replay is won (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the process upon receiving the winning action command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S771 that the normal replay is won (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus start lock is executed by the main CPU 93 (S772). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes the simulation executed when the game lock effect executed by the main CPU 93 wins the normal replay, the first stop operation is performed except for the left stop button 19L, and no penalty is generated. It is determined whether or not a command indicating that the bonus is started is received.

  If it is determined in step S772 that the main CPU 93 has not executed the lock at the start of the pseudo bonus (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process upon receiving a winning action command. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S772 that the main CPU 93 has executed the pseudo bonus start lock (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus state in the sub gaming state storage area (S773).

  Through the processing in steps S772 and S773, the sub CPU 102 can notify the player that the pseudo bonus state starts from the next game while the pseudo bonus start lock is being executed. For this reason, the sub CPU 102 does not recognize that the pseudo bonus transition combination is not a so-called bonus combination, so that the player sees the winning combination and the pseudo bonus state starts from the next game, and operates the start lever 23. By performing the lock at the start of the pseudo bonus by the main CPU 93, it is possible to execute an effect informing the start of the pseudo bonus state.

  As described above, during the RT1 gaming state, as a plurality of predetermined specific conditions, in the state of winning the pseudo bonus state, the pseudo bonus transition role is won and the pseudo bonus start lock is executed. When the above condition is satisfied, the sub CPU 102 that shifts the sub game state to the pseudo bonus state constitutes a pseudo special game state transition means.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned conditions, the plurality of predetermined specific conditions include winning a pseudo bonus type 8 and pseudo bonus in the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state process shown in FIG. In the promotion lottery (see step S757), it is constituted by winning the pseudo bonus type 7.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus selection effect selected by the player in the pseudo bonus selection effect storage area (S774). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets one of the first to third pseudo bonus selection effects selected by the player in the pseudo bonus selection effect storage area.

  As described above, the sub CPU 102 that determines which of the plurality of pseudo bonus selection effects prepared in advance is selected by the player constitutes an effect mode determination unit.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 executes the effect as the selection effect executed during the game in the pseudo bonus state based on the pseudo bonus selection effect set in step S774, so that the selection effect is executed. Configure the means.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus selection effect set in the pseudo bonus selection effect storage area is the first pseudo bonus selection effect or the second pseudo bonus selection effect (S775). . In this process, when it is determined that the first pseudo bonus selection effect or the second pseudo bonus selection effect is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the notification timing flag to ON (S776), and the notification timing. The lottery process is executed, and the value associated with the lottery result is set in the notification timing counter (S777).

  In the processing of step S777, when the first pseudo bonus selection effect is set in the pseudo bonus selection effect storage area, the sub CPU 102 refers to the loop rate set in the loop rate stock counter. First pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery table (see FIGS. 103 and 104 (a) to (c)) is determined, and the determined first pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery table is referred to. Then, the notification timing lottery is executed.

  In the process of step S777, the sub CPU 102 determines that the second pseudo bonus selection effect is set in the pseudo bonus selection effect storage area based on the set value set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 95. Then, a second pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing lottery table (see (a) to (c) in FIGS. 105 and 106) to be referred to is determined, and the determined second pseudo bonus selection effect announcement timing is determined. Referring to the lottery table, the notification timing lottery is executed.

  Thus, sub CPU102 which determines the timing which performs AT state notification effect comprises a winning notification timing determination means.

  If it is determined that the third pseudo bonus selection effect is set after the process of step S777 or in the process of step S775 (NO), the sub CPU 102 turns the pseudo bonus transition flag OFF (S778). ), The process upon receiving a winning action command is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S770 that the pseudo bonus transition state is not set in the sub gaming state storage area (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state in the sub gaming state storage area. It is determined whether or not (S779). In this process, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state is not set (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process upon receiving a winning action command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S779 that the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state is set (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state end flag is ON ( S780). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state end flag is set.

  If it is determined in step S780 that the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state end flag is OFF (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process upon receiving a winning action command. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S780 that the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state end flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning combination is pressed (S781). . In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are pressed in the pressing order for winning the eight-bell role in the winning pressing order bell.

  If it is determined in the process of step S781 that the winning combination pressing order is not the pressing order for winning the 8 bell winning combination (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo bonus transition state in the sub gaming state storage area. (S782).

  After executing the processing of step S782 or in the processing of step S781, if it is determined that the winning order is the pushing order for winning the 8 bell winning combination (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the pseudo bonus promotion game The state end flag is turned OFF (S783), and the process at the time of receiving the winning action command is ended.

  Through the process during the pseudo bonus promotion game state shown in FIG. 155 and the processes in steps S781 to S783, the sub CPU 102 executes 10 unit games in which the process during the pseudo bonus promotion game state ends, The winning condition for ending the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state is established when the player wins the bell and fails to win the eight-bell role.

  In other words, the sub CPU 102 keeps winning the eight bells even after executing 10 unit games in which the process during the pseudo bonus promotion game state ends, so that the player is in the pseudo bonus promotion game state. Can continue.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment allows the promotion of the pseudo bonus by winning the 8 bell combination even if the unit game is executed 10 times in the pseudo bonus promotion game state. Since the gaming state can be continued, it is possible to further improve the interest in the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state.

<Special mode suggestion>
FIG. 157 is a diagram showing a special mode suggesting effect executed by the sub CPU 102 when the pseudo bonus state is entered during the first AT state and during the AT state, and at the end of the transitioned pseudo bonus state.

  As shown in FIG. 157, the special mode suggesting effect is performed by the main CPU 102 performing the first AT state start pre-processing (in accordance with the combination of characters displayed in the left character display area 11L and the right character display area 11R of the liquid crystal display device 11). This suggests which special mode is set in the special mode storage area in step S604 of FIGS. 145 and 146). Here, the character combinations displayed in the character display areas 11L and 11R are determined with reference to the character combination table shown in FIG.

  For example, when the special mode 2 is set in the special mode storage area, the sub CPU 102 displays the character “Saburo” in the left character display area 11L and the character “Fukuko” in the right character display area 11R.

  When the character “Saburo” is displayed in the left character display area 11L and the character “Fukuko” is displayed in the right character display area 11R, the player can select special mode 2, special mode 2, and special mode as special modes. 3, special mode 2 and special mode 4, special mode 2, special mode 3 and special mode 4 can be recognized.

  Thus, the sub CPU 102 can suggest the special mode set in the special mode storage area by the combination of characters displayed in the character display areas 11L and 11R.

  Here, special modes 2 and 3, special modes 2 and 4, special modes 3 and 4, special modes 2, special modes 3 and 4 are special modes. When set in the mode storage area, the sub CPU 102 shifts to the pseudo bonus state during the AT state, and the special mode suggesting effect to be executed at the end of the transitioned pseudo bonus state, and the end of the transitioned pseudo bonus state A special mode suggestion effect that is different from a special mode suggestion effect that is executed during the first AT state that is executed later is configured to be executed.

  For example, when the special mode 2 and the special mode 3 are set in the special mode storage area, the sub CPU 102 shifts to the pseudo bonus state during the AT state and executes the special mode suggestion executed at the end of the transitioned pseudo bonus state. In the production, the character “Saburo” is displayed in the left character display area 11L, the character “Fukuko” is displayed in the right character display area 11R, and the first AT state executed after the transition to the pseudo bonus state is completed. In the special mode suggestion effect to be executed, the character “Jiro” is displayed in the left character display area 11L, and the character “Kotoko” is displayed in the right character display area 11R.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of special modes are set in the special mode storage area, at the end of the pseudo bonus state determined to shift to the AT state, Since the special mode suggestion effect suggesting the special mode executed in the first AT state is different from that at the time of execution of the first AT state, the player can be watched until the end of the pseudo bonus state, and at the end of the pseudo bonus state, When the execution of the first AT state is different from the performance that suggests the special mode to be executed, it is determined that a plurality of special modes are selected. Can be improved.

<Special mode notification production>
FIG. 158 is a diagram illustrating a special mode notification effect executed by the sub CPU 102 during the second AT state.

  As shown in FIG. 158, the special mode notification effect is produced by the main CPU 102 performing the first AT state start pre-processing (see FIGS. 145 and 146) by the symbols displayed in the special mode notification areas 11a to 11c of the liquid crystal display device 11. In step S604, the special mode set in the special mode storage area is notified. Here, combinations of symbols displayed in the special mode notification areas 11a to 11c are determined with reference to a symbol combination table shown in FIG.

  For example, when the special mode 2 is set in the special mode storage area, the sub CPU 102 sets the special mode notification area 11a to green and displays the symbol “A”.

  When the special mode notification area 11a turns green and the symbol “A” is displayed, the player can recognize that the special mode 2 is selected as the special mode.

  In this manner, the sub CPU 102 can notify the special mode set in the special mode storage area by the combination of characters displayed in the special mode notification areas 11a to 11c.

<Character combination table>
The character combination table shown in FIG. 159 shows the combination of characters displayed in the character display areas 11L and 11R (see FIG. 157) of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the combination of the characters in the special mode suggestion effect. Shows special modes that may be set in the special mode storage area.

  For example, when the character “Jiro” is displayed in the left character display area 11L and the character “Kotoko” is displayed in the right character display area 11R, the sub CPU 102 performs special mode in which “◯” in FIG. 159 is associated. 3, special mode 2 and special mode 3, special mode 3 and special mode 4, special mode 2, special mode 3 and special mode 4 are set in the special mode storage area.

<Symbol combination table>
The symbol combination table shown in FIG. 160 displays the combinations of colors and symbols displayed in the special mode notification areas 11a to 11c (see FIG. 158) of the liquid crystal display device 1 and the colors and symbols in the special mode notification effect. In this case, the special mode set in the special mode storage area is shown.

  For example, when the special mode display area 11a is yellow and the symbol “B” is displayed, the sub CPU 102 sets only the special mode 3 in the special mode storage area as shown in FIG.

  As described above, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs the ART lottery when the transition to the pseudo bonus state is determined, and when the ART lottery is not won, the loop rate determined at the non-winning time And the number of sets can be carried over until the ART lottery is won, so if you can finally win the ART lottery, you can expect an extra loop rate and set number of games in the AT state, a pseudo bonus Even if the AT state is not started after the game in the state is finished, the player's interest in the game can be maintained until the player wins the ART lottery, and the player can continue the AT state for a long time. The game can be played with expectation.

  In addition, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can provide a player with a lot of benefits when a plurality of loop rates are stored in the loop reference stock table of the sub-RAM 103. Can be further improved.

  Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can substantially control the transition of the gaming state between the RT0 gaming state with a low replay probability and the RT1 gaming state with a high replay probability. The amount of data handled by the main control circuit 91 can be reduced, and the load on the main control circuit 91 can be reduced.

  Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment shifts the secondary gaming state to the AT state when the ART lottery non-winning count is a specific number and the transition to the pseudo bonus state is determined. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a permanent increase in the loop rate and the number of sets, to suppress unnecessary loss on the game store side, and to allow the player to play while maintaining an appropriate level of joy. Can do.

  In addition, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a pseudo bonus selection effect selected before the start of the pseudo bonus state by the player when the transition to the pseudo bonus state is determined and the ART lottery is won. In the first AT state announcement effect as a notification mode based on the fact that the AT winning is set in the ART winning / non-acquisition storage area as an ART winning / notifying at the notification timing determined by lottery, the selected pseudo bonus The player can imagine future game development and the like, and can broaden the range of strategies for the game from the timing of the effect content notified according to the selected effect and the timing at which the first AT state notification effect is executed. It becomes possible and can enhance the interest in the development of the game.

  In addition, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes an effect suggesting different game information for each of the first to third pseudo bonus selection effects selected at the start of the pseudo bonus state. You can broaden your strategy.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is based on the normal mode in which any one normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table is set from a plurality of normal time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery tables. Since the ART lottery is executed based on the selected normal-time pseudo bonus winning ART lottery table, the probability of shifting to the AT state differs depending on the set normal mode, and the third pseudo-bonus selection effect is selected. In such a case, since the effect suggesting the set normal mode is executed at the end of the pseudo bonus state, the progress of the game can be easily predicted.

  Moreover, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can provide a difference in the winning probability of the AT state between the case of the same color transition symbol and the case of the different color transition symbol, so that it can have a change depending on the game characteristics. .

  Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a plurality of second AT state pseudo bonus lottery tables having different winning probabilities determined to shift the sub game state to the pseudo bonus state during the AT state. It has a plurality of special modes that are referred to when selecting, especially when a plurality of special modes that are determined to shift to the pseudo bonus state with high probability are selected, the transition to the pseudo bonus state is determined. Since the probability of being played is extremely high, it is possible to increase the expectation that the pseudo bonus state can be won even during the AT state, and it is possible to concentrate on the game even during the AT state, and to improve the interest in the game Can be made.

  In addition, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is notified of the continuous notification mode that is selected when the special condition is satisfied, thereby notifying the player of the winning of the pseudo bonus state and in the AT state. Since it is suggested that the loop rate is newly stored, it is possible to make the player interested in the performance mode executed in the AT state, and it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

  In addition, when the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment wins the pseudo bonus state in the AT state, the pachislot machine 1 shifts to the pseudo bonus addition state in which the number of sets in the AT state is added each time the pseudo bonus transition symbol is won. Since it is possible to shift to the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state having the possibility, it is possible to make the player interested in the change of the gaming state in the AT state, and to further improve the interest in the game.

  Further, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment shifts the sub game state to the first and second pseudo bonus states even when the transition to the pseudo bonus added state is not determined in the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state. Therefore, many benefits can be given to the player, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

  In addition, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state, even if 10 unit games are executed, by winning the 8 bell combination, the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the AT state, the replay symbol combination displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 suggests that it is easy to shift to the pseudo bonus promotion gaming state. The player can be interested in the winning combination in the AT state, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is selected in the second AT state while the special mode suggesting effect suggesting the selected special mode is executed in the first AT state. Since the special mode notification effect for informing the special mode is executed, different effects related to the special mode are executed in the first and second half of one AT state, and the player's expectation for the selected special mode is maintained. be able to.

  With this configuration, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of special modes are set in the special mode storage area, at the end of the pseudo bonus state determined to shift to the AT state, Since the special mode suggestion effect suggesting the special mode executed in the first AT state is different from that at the time of execution of the first AT state, the player can be watched until the end of the pseudo bonus state, and at the end of the pseudo bonus state, When the execution of the first AT state is different from the performance that suggests the special mode to be executed, it is determined that a plurality of special modes are selected. Can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 102 continuously shifts to the first AT state in the second AT state, the sub CPU 102 has at least one character in the character group (ally) on the left side in the longitudinal direction. When the second AT state continues to be displayed and does not continue to the first AT state, at least one character of the character group (enemy) is placed in the second AT A continuous effect that continues to be displayed until the end of the state is executed, but is not limited to this. For example, when the transition to the first AT state is continued, at least one character group (enemy) in the region on the right in the longitudinal direction If the character continues to be displayed until the end of the second AT state and does not continue to transition to the first AT state, the character group (ally) appears in the area on the left in the longitudinal direction. At least one of the characters, it may be configured to perform a production which continue to be displayed until the end of the second AT state.
In the case of the conventional gaming machine as described in the background art section, the notification mode at the time of winning the bonus in the RT gaming state can be diversified according to the performance pattern selected by the player, but substantially However, the notification timing only changes, and the notification content does not change. Therefore, the player selects only the production pattern that suits his / her preference, and since the notification is always performed in the same mode (timing), the interest in the game is likely to be impaired.
The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances as described above, and it is possible to vary the game information suggested for each presentation mode selected by the player, and to further improve the interest of the player in the game. It is also an attempt to provide a machine.

1 Pachislot machine (game machine)
3L, 3C, 3R reel 4 reel display window (design display means)
19L, 19C, 19R Stop button 23 Start lever 79 Start switch (start operation detecting means)
80L, 80C, 80R Stop switch (stop operation detection means)
91 main control circuit 93 main CPU (symbol changing means, internal winning combination determining means, reel stop control means, winning determination means, gaming state transition control means, set value changing means)
94 Main ROM
95 Main RAM
101 sub control circuit 102 sub CPU (pseudo special game state transition means, special game state transition means, specific effect state transition lottery means, first specific effect state transition means, first specific state transition means, first specific effect State game number determination means, first specific state game number determination means, second specific effect state transition means, second specific state transition means, second specific effect state game number determination means, second specific state game Number determination means, continuation transition means, continuation probability determination means, continuation count determination means, effect mode determination means, selection effect execution means, winning notification means, winning notification timing determination means, special mode selection means, pseudo special game during specific effect state State lottery means, continuation information notification means, third specific effect state lottery means, third specific effect state transition means, pseudo special game state suggestion means, special mode suggestion effect execution means Special mode notification effect execution means, pseudo special game state at the end of the special mode suggests directing execution means, game information determination means)
103 sub-RAM (continuation information storage means, non-winning number storage means)

Claims (1)

Multiple reels with multiple designs,
A symbol display means for displaying a part of the symbols displayed on the reels;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player;
A symbol changing means for changing the plurality of symbols displayed on the symbol display means by rotating the plurality of reels based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
A stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to the plurality of reels for detecting a stop operation for stopping the rotation of each reel;
By stopping the rotation of each reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the symbol display means is displayed. Reel stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol being
Special gaming state transition means for transitioning to a special gaming state advantageous to the player with respect to the grant of the game medium when any one of a plurality of predetermined specific conditions is established;
Game information determining means for determining game information related to a specific state in which information on an advantageous stop operation related to the provision of the game medium is notified when it is determined to shift to the special game state;
With
The game information determined by the game information determining means includes first game information in which a predetermined number of times of performing the specific state is defined, second game information in which a continuation rate of the specific state is defined, And the third game information in which the transition rate to the special game state is defined,
When the first game information is determined by the game information determination means and the third game information is not determined, at least the second game information is determined after the special game state is ended. Holding the first game information without shifting to the specific state,
A gaming machine, wherein when the second game information is determined by the game information determining means, the game state is shifted to the specific state after the special game state ends.